[go: up one dir, main page]

TW200830313A - Magnetic memory - Google Patents

Magnetic memory Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW200830313A
TW200830313A TW096139124A TW96139124A TW200830313A TW 200830313 A TW200830313 A TW 200830313A TW 096139124 A TW096139124 A TW 096139124A TW 96139124 A TW96139124 A TW 96139124A TW 200830313 A TW200830313 A TW 200830313A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
write
signal
circuit
data
memory
Prior art date
Application number
TW096139124A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Jun Setogawa
Original Assignee
Renesas Tech Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Renesas Tech Corp filed Critical Renesas Tech Corp
Publication of TW200830313A publication Critical patent/TW200830313A/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C11/00Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor
    • G11C11/02Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using magnetic elements
    • G11C11/16Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using magnetic elements using elements in which the storage effect is based on magnetic spin effect
    • G11C11/165Auxiliary circuits
    • G11C11/1693Timing circuits or methods
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C11/00Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor
    • G11C11/02Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using magnetic elements
    • G11C11/16Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using magnetic elements using elements in which the storage effect is based on magnetic spin effect
    • G11C11/165Auxiliary circuits
    • G11C11/1675Writing or programming circuits or methods
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11CSTATIC STORES
    • G11C11/00Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor
    • G11C11/02Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using magnetic elements
    • G11C11/16Digital stores characterised by the use of particular electric or magnetic storage elements; Storage elements therefor using magnetic elements using elements in which the storage effect is based on magnetic spin effect
    • G11C11/165Auxiliary circuits
    • G11C11/1677Verifying circuits or methods

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Mram Or Spin Memory Techniques (AREA)
  • Hall/Mr Elements (AREA)
  • Semiconductor Memories (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a magnetic memory. After data is written into a memory cell, a step for determining whether the written data from outside and the logic of the read-out data of the memory cell is consistent or not (step S3) is performed. When this written data is not consistent with the logic value of the memorized data of the memory cell, a step for once more writing the data to the memory cell which is the writing target (step S4) is performed. After this, the memorized data of the memory cell which is the writing target is read out, and the consistence between the written data and the read-out data is determined. This operation is repeated till the written data and the read-out data is consistent. Thereby, reliability of data writing of magnetic random access memory can be assured.

Description

200830313 w九、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明係有關一種磁性體記憶體,尤其有關一種將 MTJ ( Magnetic Tunneling Junction ;磁性穿隧接面)元件 (磁性牙隧接面元件)或MJT ( Magnetic Junction T腿nelmg ;磁性接面穿隧)元件(自旋穿隧接面元件;Spin Tunnel Junction )作為記憶元件來利用之記憶體。更具體 而言,本發明係有關一種用以確保資料寫入至MTJ元件 _( MJT元件)的可靠性之構成。 【先前技術】 作為非揮發性地記憶資料之半導體記憶裝置,以往已 知有快閃記憶體。該快閃記憶體之記憶體單元係由具有控 制閘極(control gate )與浮閘極(fi〇ating _ )的層疊严= 極,電晶體所構成。根據浮閘極的蓄積電荷量來變化=憶 體單凡電晶體的臨界電壓(threshold v〇ltage )。將該記憮 丨體單元電晶體的臨界電壓與記憶資料對應。於資料讀^ 時,將一定位準的電壓供給至控制間極。記憶體單元:曰 體係根據其臨界電壓,流通的電流量會不同。檢測出、:; 該記憶體單元電晶體的電流量而進行資料的讀出。机k 在快閃記憶體中,資料的寫入係以下述方式進〜。 據寫入資料,使電荷於浮閘極與基板區域(通道區n 洋閘極與源極/㈣區域之間移動,並根據記粗或 定浮閘極的蓄積電荷量。因此,在快閃記憶體、抖來設 中’由於電荷隔著絕緣膜而移動,故寫人次數1 形 ㈢口马絕緣 5 319644 200830313 ,膜的特性而受到限制。此外,由於藉由該電荷的移動來進 行資料的寫入,故有資料寫入時間長、存取時間長之問題。 為了解決這種快閃記憶體的問題,已開發一種具有存 取時間短且重寫次數無限制之特徵的 MRAM (Magneto-Resistive Random-Access Memory ;磁阻式隨機 存取記憶體)。此MRAM係利用可變磁性電阻元件來作為 記憶體單元元件。在可變磁性電阻元件中,係使用稱之為 自由層及固定層之磁性體的層疊構造。根據這些磁性體的 •磁化方向電阻值會不同,且依據該電阻值來記憶資料。 作為MRAM,在習知的電流磁場寫入方式MRAM中, 於資料寫入時,電流會流通至相互正交的數位(digit)線及 位to (bit)線。豬由流通這些數位線及位兀線的電流所感應 的磁場之合成磁場,來設定可變磁性電阻元件(MTJ元件 (磁性穿隧接面元件))的自由層的磁化方向。固定層的 磁化方向係固定於一定的方向而與施加磁場無關。 0 在這種習知的MRAM中,為了產生重寫所需的磁場, 係要求一定大小的電流。因此,隨著記憶體單元的徵型化, 電源線的寬度亦變小,如此,產生磁場所需的電流亦會變 大。並且,P逢著微型化,記憶體單元的可變磁性電阻元件 間的距離亦變小。由於施加至選擇記憶體單元的磁場之洩 漏磁場,會產生非選擇記憶體單元的記憶資料產生變化之 問題。 此外,於電流磁場寫入方式的記憶體單元中,易磁化 ' 轴(easy axis of magnetization)係配置於與位元線或數位 6 319644 200830313 w線平行的方向。此愔勒·^ μ ^ ^ 、先下’於+選擇狀態(選擇數位線或 位元線的狀態)的却+立触话一 + ]尤k、體早tl中,由於流通數位線或位元 -線的電流所感應的石兹误么立丄 ]兹%,會產生反轉其記憶資料這種一轴 干擾(distuTb)的問題。 作為肩除這種一軸干擾問題的mram,已開發一種雙 L觸夂(toggle ) MRAM及自旋注入型磁化反轉寫入方式 MRAM (自旋扭力轉移隨機存取記憶體(Spin-Torque TmnsferRAM);以下簡稱為自旋注入型·ΑΜ)。 r 於雙態觸變MRAM中嗜記憶體單元的記憶元件的易 磁化軸及難磁化軸配置成與數位線及位元線呈45。角度。 此外以 SAF( synthetic antiferromagnetic;人造反鐵磁層) 構造來構成自由層。於該SAF構造中,夹著反強磁性輕^ 層來配置兩個強磁性體層。於資料寫入時,錯開電流流通 數位線及位元線的時序(timing),使該自由層的磁化旋 轉。由於使用數位線及位元線兩者使自由層的磁化方向旋 #轉,故即使被施加來自一個軸(數位線或位元線)的洩漏 磁場,亦不會產生自由層的磁化方向的旋轉,而可消除一 軸干擾的問題。 在自旋注入型磁化反轉寫入方式MRAM(自旋注入型 MRAM)中,藉由固定層的磁化方向來設定通過固定層的 電子的自旋分極方向。將已決定該自旋分極方向的電^流 入自由層或從自由層抽出,藉此調整自由層的電子的自= 分極方向以設定自由層的磁化方向。 疋 在被稱為自旋扭力轉移隨機存取記憶體之自旋、、主7型 319644 7 200830313 MRAM中’於寫人時’電流會經由記憶體單元的可變磁性 免戸且70件(MT J TG件)而流通。因此,由於利用電子自旋 而不會產生磁場,故能消除一軸干擾的問題。 、記憶體裝置具有複數個記憶體單元。例如在記憶容量 為一兆位兀(megabit)的記憶體裝置中,設置有約1〇〇 =憶體單元。在這些複數個記憶體單元之間存在有微妙 偏呈。因此,在以相同的條件對全部的記憶體單元 進仃貧料重寫的情形下,必須將複數個記憶體單元的可重 寫範圍彼此重疊的區域作為重寫條件來設定。因此,用以 寫的寫人條件會變的狹窄,且產生寫人不良的概率 用以在貝料寫入時進行是否已正確地進行資料的寫 =:驗證一動作,一直以來係在快閃記憶 中,在ί利文獻1 (曰本特開平10-302487號公報) ^…舄入驗證動作,當寫入資料與寫入對象的記 匕體早福記憶資料-致時,停止之後的寫人。於每次窝 :時進行驗證動作,並將該寫入及驗證動作執行預定; ’直至寫人對象的記憶體單元的記憶資料與寫人資料_ f為止。於每次寫人時變更寫人脈波寬度並進行寫入。备 ^執行驗證達到預定次數亦未正確地進行資料寫入時: 對象的記憶體單元視為不良’對外部發送 亚結束寫入。 、知 專利文獻1的發明係交互地執行寫入及寫入驗證. 319644 8 200830313 、此停止對於不需寫入的記憶體單元之 、隹/ 一 亚對母個位元 «丁記憶體單元的臨界㈣㈣1謀求穩定地進行 hKl W1 rt 在專利文獻2(日本特開2005_44454號公報)中,於 記憶體中,於寫人後進行寫人驗證,判斷記憶體單元 :晶體的臨界值(threshGld)是否在預定·圍内。於驗 也後再次進行寫人時’會變更寫人脈波電堡及/或脈波 度並執行寫入。 、 曾專,文獻2的發明係將寫入後的記憶體單元的臨界電 堡分布寬度維持在預定範圍,並將寫人後的臨界電壓及消 除後的臨界電壓的差值設寬,以謀求抑制記憶體裝置的特 性劣化。 專利文獻3 (曰本特開2004_22112號公報)係揭示一 種以高速地進行頁編程(page pr〇gram)為目的之快閃記 憶體。於該專利文獻3所示的構成中,針對一頁的資料執 鲁行以頁為單位的寫入及驗證,並在每次驗證時,針對已結 束寫入的單元,會停止之後的寫入。 該專利文獻3的發明係以複數個位址單位重複進行寫 入及驗證。與在每個位址進行寫入及驗證讀出的情形相 比,係謀求縮短編程(program )所需的時間,並實現高速 的頁編程。 此外,專利文獻4 (曰本特開2003_346484)係揭示一 種進行馬入驗證之絕緣膜電荷捕獲(charge trapping )型記 f®體。於專、利文獻4所示的構成中,在寫入翁證後,會針 9 319644 200830313 t對寫入不良的記憶體單元調整寫入電壓位準並執行再寫 入。寫=驗證次數係設t最大值,當即使達到該最大值而 對象單元仍然舄入不良時,係判斷該記憶體單元為不良。 1利文獻4的發㈣藉由進行寫人及驗證,謀求降㈣加 寫入脈波的次數以防止施加過多的寫入脈波至記情 電晶體(NROM單元電晶體)的絕緣膜,而維持可靠性。 —此外1於該專散獻4中’係於再“時階段性地進 :舄入’糟此謀未防止施加過多的㈣至記憶元 體(NROM電晶體)。 早兀电日日 專利文獻5 (日本特開平丨〗.奶乃號公報)係揭示一 的觀:ΪΓΓ需的最大時間為目的之快閃記憶體 、 缺所不的構成中,係於測試模式脖, 二預,定的最大驗證次數執輯於記憶體的窝入及驗 二虽結束該最大次數的寫入/驗證時,對外部發送忙石亲 d虎BUSY。藉由在外部觀測忙碌信 二 謀精此_取差的編程時間作為規格值予 谋未將糸統設計簡單化。 保也而 2文獻6(曰本特開平⑽麵)—種长 貝料寫入時間之快閃記憶體。專獻㈣求 出穹入叙从π士 an ^ f ~ x獻6中,判斷 舄入動作日守流通的寫入電流值是否變得比京λ从土 值還小。合_驾入恭士妈 "、入'、、口束判斷 舄电'"丨L邊得比判斷值還小時,停止京入 =於資料寫入後,從寫入對象的記憶二: 1行驗證動作的必要,而謀求縮短寫入時間續出貝科 利文獻7 (日本特開2购咖號公報)_ 319644 10 200830313 ‘一種於相位變化(phase change)記憶體中進行寫入及寫入 驗證之構成。專利文獻7之發明係將記憶體單元設定成高 電阻狀態的重置(reset)狀態時之寫入作為對象。亦即, -於寫入至相位變化記憶體單元時,讀出寫入對象的相位變 化記憶體單元的記憶值,並與寫入資料進行比較。當比較 結果為不一致時,供給寫入電流。每次重複該寫入時,寫 入電流量會增大。 專利文獻7之發明,係於相位變化記憶體單元中,即 _使下部電極與相位變化元件的接觸面積有偏差,且由於不 完全的非結晶化使電阻值偏差時,亦能謀求防止資料的誤 讀出。亦即,重複進行該寫入及寫入驗證,藉此將重置狀 態的相位變化記億體單元的電阻值設定成預定值以上而無 關相位變化元件與下部電極的接觸面積大小,並降低電阻 值的偏差。 專利文獻8 (日本特開2004-362761 )係揭示一種進行 $相位變化記憶體單元中的寫入及驗證之構成。專利文獻8 之發明,由於在相位變化記憶體單元的朝低電阻的設定 (set)狀態進行寫入時,設定狀態的記憶體單元的電阻值係 依存於重置狀態時的電阻值,從而謀求防止產生朝設定狀 態之誤寫入。於該專利文獻8中,朝設定狀態進行寫入時, 監控位元線電壓,只要該位元線電壓達到預定的基準電壓 時,停止朝設定狀態進行寫入。當位元線電壓變的比基準 電壓還小時,表示寫入對象的記憶體單元已變成低電阻的 設定狀態·。從而,抑制寫入至記憶體單元後的設定狀態的 11 319644 200830313 *電阻值之偏差。 上述專利文獻丨至8係顯示謀求㈣記 :戈相位變化記憶體的寫入穩定化之構成。亦即,於專: 獻1中,首先進行對於記憶體單元的寫入驗證,之後鮮 驗證結果純行㈣的^。於料场證㈣行== 時^整寫人脈波的時間寬度,並控於浮閘極的注入 電荷量U,專社獻〗所示的構成係將 為對象,當進行過寫人時,注人有浮動電荷(電子 界2壓^同。因此,t進行再寫人時’由於單元的狀態 與丽次寫入時不同,故為了降低寫入後的臨界電壓之偏 差,係要求巧妙地調整寫入脈波寬度以進行寫入。另一方 ::在MR^AM的情形中’當寫入不良時,寫入後的記憶體 單元係與寫入前為相同狀態,且出發狀態亦相同。因此, 當如專利文獻Γ所示,小幅度地調整寫入脈波寬度並重複 寫入時,反而會增大寫入/寫入驗證的次數,故有寫入時 間變長的可能性。因此,無法將專利文獻i的構成直接適 用於MARM。 在專利文獻2的構成中,於可重寫的記憶體單元 (NROM單元)中,於絕緣膜捕獲電荷,並調整記憶體單 元電晶體的臨界電壓。因此,在寫入時,於絕緣膜蓄積電 荷,故每次寫入時該記憶體單元的臨界電壓會產生變化。 因此,專利文獻2亦無法直接適用於如MRAM —樣當產生 寫入不良時έ己憶體單元會恢復至寫入前的狀態之記憶體裝 置。 12 319644 200830313 ‘ ^專利文獻3中,雖顯示頁編程,但仍藉由㈣極的 電荷蓄積會使記憶體單元電晶體的臨界電壓產生變化而吃 -憶資料。因此,與專利文獻丨、2同樣,無法直=適用二 ’ MRAM的資料寫入之構成。 、 專利文獻4係顯示快閃記憶體中的寫入驗證。然而, =專利文獻4中,每次寫人時記憶體單元電晶體的臨界電 昼亦會產生變化。因此,專利文獻4的構成 法 適用於MRAM的寫入構成。 罝接 專利文獻5僅於測試模式時的最大編程時間内進行寫 入及驗證。並且’於測試模式時可在外部觀測寫入時的最 大編程時間。因此,在專利文獻5所示的構成中,記 =為快閃記憶體單元,於每次寫人時,記憶體單⑽ =電壓亦會產生變化。因此,專敎獻5_成亦無法直 〃適用於寫人不㈣記憶體單元會恢復至初始狀 狀態)的MRAM之構成。 C原始 在專利文獻6所示的構成中,於資料寫入時監控寫入 完Ϊ寫入。因此,專利文獻6所㈣ 反Μ :始、二同雙愍觸變MRAM不論是否對位元線 外,於:進仃貝料寫入皆流通相同大小的電流之構成。此 取記憶體= :反轉寫入方式之自旋扭力轉移隨機存 插—、 '入型MRAM中,根據寫入資料的邏輯 專利文獻· 7係顯示相位變化記憶體單元的寫入及驗 319644 13 200830313 ,證。於該相位變化記憶體單元中,高電阻的重置狀態的電 阻值係依存於低電阻狀態的設定狀態時的電阻值,且設定 -狀態的記憶體單元的電阻值係依存於重置狀態的記憶體單 1元的電阻值。於MRAM中,係未存在資料寫入前的記憶體 單元的電阻值與資料寫入後的記憶體單元的電阻值之直接 性的依存關係。因此,在MRAM中,利用每次寫入驗證時 會使寫入電流的大小產生變化之構成的情形中,於寫入完 成後亦會供給寫入電流而產生進行不需要的寫入之狀態。 _因此,專利文獻7的寫入順序(sequence)亦無法直接適 用於MRAM 〇 於專利文獻8所示的構成中,係將相位變化記憶體單 元的位元線電壓變化成預定的基準電壓。因此,如同雙態 觸變MRAM,在不論是否為寫入狀態皆流通一定大小的電 流之情形中,無法適用專利文獻8所示的構成。同樣地, 於自旋注入型MRAM中,每次寫入資料時流通位元線的電 •流之方向不同,故專利文獻8所示之於一方方向流通位元 線電流的相位變化記憶體的寫入順序無法適用於MRAM。 【發明内容】 本發明的目的係提供一種能正確地進行資料的寫入之 MRAM 〇 本發明的另一目的係提供一種能穩定地寫入資料之雙 態觸變MRAM或自旋注入型MRAM等之無一軸干擾的 MRAM 〇 簡而言之,本發明之磁、性記憶體(非揮發性磁性記憶 14 319644 200830313 -)係育料寫入時進行資料寫入及驗證者。當於驗證時檢 测出貧料寫入不良時,記憶體單元會變成與寫入前相同的 狀怨,並從與寫入前相同的狀態進行再寫入。 亦即,於本發明的一個實施形態中,磁性體記憶體係 2備有·複數個記憶體單元;寫入系電路,係將寫入資料 舄入至祓數個記憶體單元中成為寫入對象的記憶體單元; 馬入控制電路,係比較該寫入對象的記憶資料與寫入 貝料。複數個記憶體單元的各者係包含有可變磁性電阻元 件且藉由該可變磁性電阻元件的電阻值來記憶資料。寫 入,制電路係於資料寫人至寫人對象的記憶體單元後,比 車乂舄入對象的記憶體單元的記憶資料與寫入資料。依據該 車乂、果,針對舄入對象的記憶體單元,寫入電路會選擇 性地執行寫入。當寫入對象的記憶體單元進行再寫入時, 係從與寫入前相同的初始狀態進行再寫入。 於本發明中,係進行是否已正確地進行寫入之驗證。 、口 =此抑制產生資料寫入不良,並能實現可靠度高的資 A此外,寫入不良的記憶體單元係從與前次寫入相同的 狀態進行再耷Λ m ^ ^ 再舄入。因此,在一貫施形態中,於每次寫入時 二%則4的寫人條件,藉此能根據記憶體單元的特性 、ΛΑ進行再寫入,而能實現正確的再寫入。 319644 15 200830313 •【實施方式】 以下麥照圖式說明本發明的較佳實施例。 • 「構成原理」 , 記憶體單元的可變磁性電阻元件的構成工·· 第1圖係概略地顯示作為記憶體單元所包含之可變磁 陸电阻元件VR來使用的雙態觸變單元的J元 仵的構造。於第1圖中,可變磁性電阻元件又厌係包含有 自由層(free layer) 1、釘扎層(])][11116(11叮灯〉2、以及設置 ⑩於自由層1及釘扎層2之間的穿隧阻障層(umnel心― layer) 3。自由層1係包含有··強磁性膜fmi、fm2,係 具有大致相同的磁矩(moment);以及非磁性膜af,係 設置於強磁性膜:FM1及FM2之間。 自由層1係兩個強磁性膜FM1及FM2將非磁性層AF 夾於中間之三層構造的反平行耦合元件(SAF)。於自由 層1中,非磁性層AF係作為反強磁性搞合層而作用。強 籲磁陡膜FM1及FM2在未施加磁場的狀態中,由於交換孝禺 合故磁化方向為相反方向(反平行狀態)。 針扎層2係例如由強磁性膜以及反強磁性膜所構成, 由於反強磁性交換耦合,磁化方向會固定而無關於施加磁 場的方向。根據強磁性膜FM2及釘扎層2的磁化方向為相 同方向(平行狀態)或反平行狀態,該可變磁性電阻元件 VR (MJT元件:SaVChENKO MJT元件)的電阻值會不 同。使該電阻值對應2值資訊。 於未施加磁場的狀態中,自由層1及釘扎層2的磁化 16 319644 200830313 .方向不會變化。此外,僅依照磁化方向來記憶資訊。因此, 不會^生茂漏電流等之影響,能非揮發性地記憶資料。 -第2圖係概略地顯示該可變磁性電阻元件VR的陣列 内的配置。針對可變磁性電阻元件VR設置位元線扯及 數位線DL。該位元線扯及數位線DL係設置成彼此正交。 可變磁性電阻元件VR的易磁㈣χΕ係以實質上與)立元 線B L以及數位線D L呈4 5。角度的方式來配置可變磁性電 阻元件VR通$,於未施加磁場的狀態中,可變磁性電 •阻元件VR的磁化方向係沿著易磁化轴χΕ的方向。與該 易磁化軸ΧΕ正交的方向存在有難磁化軸χΗ。 第3圖係顯示雙態觸變MRAM單元的資料寫入時的 MJT元件的磁化旋轉順序之圖。以下,參照第3圖,針對 έ己憶體單元的資料寫入動作加以說明。 首先,在期間# 〇中,數位線DL及位元線BL不會流 通電流。因此,於可變磁性電阻元件VR中,會根據易磁 ⑩化軸XE來設定並維持自由層的磁化方向。 在期間·# 1中,僅數位線DL流通電流。藉此,沿著 位元線延伸方向產生磁場H1。藉由該磁場H1,於自由層 中交換耦合會崩潰(自旋翻轉(spin fl〇p)狀態),自由 層的兩個強磁性膜(FM1、FM2)的合成磁場會變成與該 感應磁場H1為相同方向。 在期間# 2中,在數位線DL流通電流的狀態下.,位 凡線BL流通電流。此情形下,由於位元線bl的電流,磁* 場H2會產生於與數位線延伸方向平行的方向。自由層的 17 319644 200830313 y固強磁性膜的磁化會旋轉,俾使磁場m及H2的合成磁 場與自由層的合成磁場變成相同的方向。 .ώ在期間#3中’切斷數位線DL的電流,僅位元線BL 2通電流。此情形下,僅磁場H2會產生於與數位線DL 的方向。因此’自由層的合成磁場會變成與位元線電 &的感應磁場H2相同的方向,自由層的磁化再次旋轉。 在期間#4中’切斷位元線BL的電流供給。此時,數 ,線DL亦未供給電流。此情形下,於自由層中,變成由 乂換輕合所主導’該自由層的磁化會配向於易磁化抽证 而反轉。 口此在期間# 〇及期間# 4中,自由層的磁化方向會 反轉。可變磁性電阻元件vr(Savchenk〇谢元件) 的電阻值會根據自由層!的強磁性膜腹2與針扎層2的磁 化方向而被設定。因此,在期間# 〇及期間#4中,可變磁 生電阻元件VR的電阻值會變化,而能記憶2值資料。 | 、如同上述,在雙態觸變MRAM>,能以單極性的電流 财波方疋4磁化’藉此能寫人資料。於該寫人順序中,益關 可變磁性電阻元件的勒始狀態,在-個寫入順序中自由、層 =磁化=向冒疑轉18〇。。因此’當資料寫入至記憶體單元 寸於舄入月出兄憶貢料,僅在記憶資料與寫入資料不 同時’使記憶體單元的可變磁性電阻元件的磁化方向反轉。 -此外’在可變磁性電阻元件中,對於流通寫入電流的 位疋線與數位線,易磁化軸具有45。的角度。因此,僅以 一條電源供給線無法進行位元反轉,故不會發生-軸干擾 319644 18 200830313 •的問題。然而,當外部磁 強磁性膜皆配向於外部磁尸方又报強時’自由層的兩個 -些磁化不-^會配向至“二當降低磁場強度時,這 隶適當寫入磁場係且有卜 、貝科舄入日守, 比蔣白胃的磁場強度還大’且 比將自由層的兩個強磁性 / 且 度還小的強度。 膜的磁化朝向相同方向的磁場強 此外,於資料寫入時 吝斗仓 +使用早極性的電流脈波,能將 生舄入電、級的部分構成予以簡略化。 、 可變磁性電阻元件的構成2 ·· 弟4圖係概略地顯示瓦综纟 I、、貝不了鉍磁性電阻元件的另一構成之 圖。於弟4圖中,择顧;ώ # 风之 Λ/Γϋ 甲係頦不自旋注入磁化反轉寫入方式的 紙倾單元(自較人型败ΑΜ)的構造作材變磁^ = 。可變磁性電阻元件VR係由贿元件所構成, 匕δ有自由層11、釘扎声12、[”芬你认占丄 ρ 』札層12、以及位於自由層11與釘扎 層12之間的穿隧絕緣膜丨3。 ^自由層11及釘扎層12係由強磁性體所構成。於該可 變磁性電阻元件VR中,當電子從針札層12流入穿隨絕緣 膜13時,會使該電子的自旋方向一致。利用此時自旋方向 致的電子的自旋扭力(spin torque)作用,使自由層11 的電子的自旋方向一致以設定磁化方向。在該mjt θ元件 中,亦根據自由層11與釘扎層12的磁化方向電阻值會不 同,根據該電阻值來記憶資料。 在以下的說明中,將電流磁場反轉型的磁性-電阻元件 稱為MTJ元件,將自旋注入磁場反轉型的磁性電阻元件稱 319644 19 200830313 為MJT元件。 弟5圖(A)及第5圖(B)係示意地顯示第4圖所示 -的MJT元件的資料寫入時的電流流動之圖。在第$圖(八) •中’寫入電流IW從釘扎層12朝自由層u流動。此情形 下,電子e從自由層1丨齡扎層12流動 自旋方向齡扎層12的自旋偏極方向不同時,會在穿J 緣膜13反射’使自由層u的電子的自旋方向變化成盘釘 扎層12相反的方向。具有與她層12的自旋偏極方向相 •同的自旋,極之電子e會通過釘扎層12。因此,在自由層 11中,係藉由自旋扭力的傳達而將磁化方向設定成與釘扎 層12的磁化方向相反的方向。 "在核狀態中,自由層卟與釘扎層12的磁化方向為反 平行方向,為高電阻狀態。該狀態係例如對應至記憶有資 料為「H」(邏輯高位準)的狀態。 在第5圖(B )中,寫入電流I w從自由層j j流動至 瞻釘=層12。此情形下,電子^從釘扎層朝自由層n流動。 該電子e的自旋偏極方向係配向至釘扎層12的自旋偏極方 向。因此,經由穿隧絕緣膜13朝自由層u注入的電子e 係具有與釘扎層12的自旋偏極方向相同的自旋偏極方 向一 口此’自由層11係磁化成與該釘扎層12的磁化方向 相同的方向。該狀態為低電阻狀態,係對應至例如記憶資 料為「L」(邏輯低位準)的狀態。 主貧料讀出時,讀出電流從自由層11朝釘扎層12流動。 此情形下,為了不使自由層11的磁化方向因為讀出電流而.. 20 319644 200830313 反轉’故將該讀出電流設定成遠小於寫入電流。 當為該第4圖所示的可變磁性一 •時,於皆料宜入a 几件VR的情形 、守於貝科寫入%不會利用電流感應磁場。亦即 注入磁化反轉寫入方式的Mram 疋 T <堇供給電流至選 早兀。因此,在半選擇狀態的記憶體單元中,寫 =流不會流通’且由於亦未存在編場,故一柏干】 的問題充分地受到控制。 這些節元件及贿元件皆能構成不會產生一轴干 擾的記憶體。於本發明中,尤苴嗱卡、丄 其碟求攻種無一軸干擾的 MRAM中的資料寫入之穩定化。 弟=圖係顯示本發明的磁性記憶體的整體原理構成之 圖。、=第6圖中,磁性記憶體係包含有記憶體單元【排 列成仃列狀之記憶體單元陣列2〇c>該記憶體單元係可 含有將第1圖及第4圖所示的MTJ元件及MJT元件的 任者作為§己憶元件而構成。本發明皆能適用於第丨圖所 •示的雙態觸變MRAM單元以及第4圖所示的自旋注入型 MRAM單元。 二磁性έ己憶體亦包含有:寫入系電路22,係對記憶體單 70 MC進行資料寫入;讀出系電路23,係對記憶體單元進 行貝料碩出;以及寫入控制電路24,係控制寫入系電路22 的寫入動作。 寫入系電路22係根據寫入資料WD來供給用以將資 料寫入至寫入對象的記憶體單元之寫入電流。因此,該寫 入系電路22係因應根據記憶體單元MC為雙態觸變 21 319644 200830313 MRAM及自旋注入型MRAM,其内部構成會不同。在此, 示寫二㈣路22會供給寫入電流至寫入對象的記憶 體早儿MC,猎此設定記憶體單元Mc的可變磁性電阻元 二的電阻值?1於該寫入系電路22的具體構成,係於後述 。兒明的具體實施形態中再詳細說明。 =電路23係於資料讀出時供給讀出電流至選擇 疏體早兀’亚根據該電流值來讀出記憶體單元的記 :旦並=電4量會不同。於讀出系電路23中檢測出該電 流里亚產生I買出資料RD。 舄入控制電路24係經由讀出系電路23從寫 記憶體單元MC讀出記憶資料RD,並判斷所讀的次祖 RD與寫入資料WD的邏輯位準為一致或不一;判 斷結果表示為寫入不良時,會根據寫入資料對寫入:二 記憶體單元進行寫人。有關寫人控制電路Μ的構成亦会 述說明的各實施形態中再詳細說明。 、/s 第7圖係顯示第6圖所示的磁性記愴 雔a MRAM時的寫入動作的流程圖。第8圖係顯示第::所: 的磁性記憶體為自旋注入型MRAM 宜^不 流程圖。以下,分別參照第7.圖及第δ圖 不的磁性記憶體的寫入動作順序。 圖所 首先參照第7圖’說明第6圖所示 態觸變MRAM時的資料寫入順序。 丄體為雙 .寫入控制電路24係監控來自未圖示的外部之指令,並 22 319644 200830313 -判斷是否已被指定資 24係監控指令並等待接收寫入=二)。寫入控制電路 •為止。 ’·’、曰 直至被指定資料寫入 " 當被指定資料宜A。士 ^ 電踗?3 、舄入舄入控制電路24备酿 电路23,以讀出記憶體單元 “區動讀出系 體單元的資科RD (步驟S2)。 的寫入對象的記憶 ^進订判斷所讀出的資料RD虚窝a -=立準是否相同(步驟S3)。當寫入對=貧料奶的 記憶資料肋與寫入資料趾的邏:f憶體單元 對該舄入對泉的記憶體單元進行寫入。冑相同時,不 信另一方面’當該寫入資料WD與讀出資料P 值不同時,寫入資料至寫入對象的記恃體軍#奶的邏輯 於繼入時,寫入控制電路24會根據:(步广S4 )。 入系電路24。 _、、、吉果來驅動寫 猎由該寫入系電路22對寫入對象的 進行資料寫入後,接著,寫入控制電路以二:體單元MC 象的記憶體單元的記憶資料(步驟S5)胃出該寫入對 會進行與步驟S2的預讀(pre_r 步驟S5中’ 再次返回步驟S3,判斷讀出資料RD與 一。之後 輯值為-致或不-致。反覆執行步驟ϋ資料WD的邊 作,直至寫入資料WD與讀出資料RD的邏輕步驟%的操 接著,參照第8圖,說明第6圖值—致為土。 自旋注入型MRAM時的資料寫入順序。 沒Ck髎韵 舄入控制電路24係監控來自外邻 Q 1知令,並判斷是否‘· 319644 23 200830313 .接收到指示寫入的指令(步驟sl〇)。 當被指示資料寫入時’寫入系電路22會 黾路24的控制對兮己悔_ | 工 據寫入資料的邏輯值 $ #此^形下,根 件的電流方向。 疋⑷己憶體早元MC的繼元 的控:::t後’讀出系電路23會根據寫入控制電路24 •叫。舄人對象的記憶體單元的記憶資料(步驟 料,寫入控制電路24會進行判斷讀出⑽ 貝料WD的邏輯值是否一致(步驟S13) 。_ 當該判斷結果表示為一致時,結束對於該寫入對 兄憶體單元之資料寫入。另—方面 :、 料的邏輯值不一致時,再次返回步驟su,進 對象的記憶體單元的資料寫入。反覆執行步驟至= •犯的驗證動作,直至該寫入對象的記憶體單二= 料RD與寫入資料貿!)的邏輯值—致為止。貝貝 如第7圖及第8圖所示’於資料寫入時, 入對象的記憶體單元的記憶資料與寫入:=出: 後,會停止對於該寫入對象的記憶體單元之致 能確實地將資料寫入至寫入對象的記憶體單 資料寫入的可靠性。 且此保證 $ 9圖(A)至(C)係顯示嫩施單元耷士 與不良產生概率之圖。於第.9圖(A )至 ,”、4寸性 [)中,上侧的 319644 24 200830313 示 圖形係減不§己憶體早元的寫入特性,下侧係顯卞不^產生 概率。在這些顯示寫入特性及不良產生概率的圖中,係使 寫入磁場的大小一致來顯示。並且,在第9圖(a)及(C) 中,係顯示對於1 FIT的不良產生概率的單元的重寫條 件。比!附大的不良產生概率的寫入條件係以斜線: 1 FIT係表示於1〇5小時(10萬小時)產生一次不良。 _ MRAM單元於進行再“時,會處於與前次寫入時相 同的狀恝(磁化方向為平行或反平行狀態)。單元 基本上係利用磁性體的磁性分極。於成為該磁性分極來源 的電子的自旋分極中,由於熱的影響,自旋進動响 precession)的方向會概率性地變化。因此,如第$圖(a) 至(C)所示,即使以相同的條件進行寫入,由於口 藉由使以次數增加而降低產生寫人不良的 的可能性。 丁 …並且,在每次寫入時改變寫入條件,藉此在各他細 黯元件及順元件)妁相同狀§進行寫入時 故疋確實地寫人記憶體單元的條件,故能確實地進 元件Γ寫^件變更時’於記憶體單元的可變磁性電阻 狀能進化方向的反平行狀態及平行狀態的中間 行=二入’而是從寫入前的平行狀態或反平行狀態進 丁:入。因此,再寫入時的初始狀態相同, — 而要考慮過度舄入的問題。並且,由於不會過声 舄入,因此無須以使臨界電壓 曰又 .行寫入。&政6 j幅度逐漸交化的方式來進 此將馬入條件從寫入時的最適值依序變更來進行 25 319644 200830313 •寫入,並能在短時間進行正確的寫入。 如上所述,依據本發明,於資料寫入時,進行寫入資 •料是否已正確地被寫入之驗證動作。因此,即使記憶體單 •元的特性產生變化時,亦能保證正確的寫入。 [實施形態一] 第ίο圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態一的雙態觸 變MRAM整體的構成之圖。於第10圖中,在記憶體單元 陣列20中記憶體單元MC係排列成行列狀。對應該記憶體 _單元的列(row )係設置有位元線BL,對應記憶體單元 MC的行(column )係設置有數位線DL及字(word)線WL。 記憶體單元MC係包含有可變磁性電阻元件VR( ΜΊ7 元件)以及與該可變磁性電阻元件VR串聯連接的存取電 晶體TRS。該存取電晶體TRS係於對應的字線WL被選擇 時導通,而將可變磁性電阻元件VR結合至源極線(以接 地節點表示)。於資料寫入時,字線WL為非選擇狀態, ⑩存取電晶體TRS處於非導通狀態。可變磁性電阻元件VR 係以對應數位線DL及位元線BL的交叉部之方式來配 置。數位線DL係一端連接至電源節點,而|元線BL的 一端亦結合至電源節點。 寫入控制電路24係包含有:指令解碼器62,係將經 由連接墊PAD而接收的指令予以解碼,而產生寫入指示信 號Write及讀出指示信號Read ;時序產生器(timing generator) 64,係根據來自指令解碼器62的動作模式指示 信號來產生寫入位元線驅動信號W_BL以及寫入數位線〜驅 26 319644 200830313 ‘動信號w_DL等之時序控制信號;以及比較器⑷從 該記憶體單元陣列2〇的選摆 _ ^ 扪、擇记憶體單兀經由讀出放大器 …(a11115· ) 58而讀出的資料與從輸入資料閃鎖哭65 ,所接收的資料進行比較。 ^ TO 65 :序產生64係例如由順序控制器(_ _tr〇ller)户斤構成,係根據預定的順序來控制資料的寫 分貝〜出動作。於第1G圖中,係顯示在 該化序產生器64中產生與寫入相關連之控制信號。 #寫入系電路2〇係包含有針對數位請及字線机而 設置的X解碼器50及iu驅動哭/WT跡氣巧 WL而 對位元線BL·而設置的位元绫 态52’以及針 直的位兀線驅動器56及Y解碼器54。 X解碼器50係將來自位址吼鎖器69的内部位址传號 ADD (X位址信號)予以解碼,而產生用以指定 ^ 位址的記憶體單元行之信號。 曰疋 DL驅動器/ WL驅動器52係根據來自該又 籲的記憶體單元行指定信號以及來自時序產生器的寫^ 指示信號來驅動數位線见及字線狐。於資料寫時式 见驅動器、/WL驅動器52係形成對應選擇記憶體單元— ,數位線DL的放電路徑。藉此,於選擇記憶體單: 數位線DL,電流會從電源節點經由DL驅動器流向接地節 點。^驅動器係於資料讀出時將對應已被指定位址的^ .憶體單元行而配置时線WL_成選擇狀態。如此,^ 選擇記憶體單元中,存取電晶體TRS會導通, 位 元線BL與源極線(接地節點)之—間形成電流路= 319644 27 200830313 Y解碼器54係接收來自位址閂鎖器69的内部位址 號ADD(Y位址信號),而產生用以選擇記憶體單元陣^ 20的已被指定位址的記憶體單元列之信號。 位元線驅動器56係於資料寫入時將選擇位元線予以 放電。當位域机為非選擇狀態時,位元線驅動器⑹系 將該非選擇位元線BL維持在㈣㈣位準。於資料讀出 時,位元線驅動器56係變成輸出高阻抗(_ —dan 狀態。 讀出放大器58係於資科讀出時將流通於選擇位元線 的電,與基準值(電進行比較,並產生用以表示該記 憶體早兀MC的記憶資料之内部信號。作為一例,例如★賣 出放大器係將對應流通於選擇位元線的電流之電壓鱼基= 電壓進行比較。 土 頃出放大器58中的比較基準電壓、用以規定位元 動器56的放電電流量之基準電壓、以及用以規定DL驅動 器的數位線DL的放電電流量之基準電壓,係由心紆產生 電路60所產生。 此外,輸入資料閂鎖器65係讀取供給至連接墊pAD 的輸入資料DJ而產生内部寫入資料。輸出資料閂鎖器〇 係讀取從讀出放大器58所讀出的賢料,並經由對應的連接 墊而作為外部讀出資料D0輪出。位址閂鎖器69係將從外 部經由連接墊所提供的位址信號AD予以閂鎖,並產生内 部位址信號AD ( X及γ位址信號)。這些閃鎖器的閂鎖 時序係藉由時序產生器64來設定。當指令指定存取模式 319644 28 200830313 * (資料寫入或讀出模式)時,在時序產生器64的控制下, 這些閂鎖器65、67、69會變成閂鎖狀態。 - 第11圖係更具體地顯示第10圖所示的雙態觸變 -MRAM的主要部分的構成之圖。於第Π圖中,係代表性 地顯示與設置於記憶體單元陣列20的位元線BL及數位線 DL相關連的部分之構成。 於第11圖中,X解碼器50係包含有數位線解碼電路 70,係對應數位線DL雨設置。該數位線解碼電路70係包 _含有:AND (及)閘G1,係於寫入時產生活性化信號; AND閘G2,係將X位址信號XADD予以解碼;以及NAND (反及)閘NG1,係根據這些AND閘G1及G2的輸出信 號而產生用以選擇對應的數位線之信號。 AND閘G1係接收寫入數位線驅動信號W—DL、比較 器66的輸出信號P/F、以及寫入指示信號Write。AND 閘G2係接收X位址信號XADD,並在該X位址信號XADD _指定對應的數位線位址時,產生活性狀態的信號。 NAND閘NG1係於這些AND閘G1及G2的輸出信號 皆為活性狀態(Ή位準)時,產生活性狀態(L位準)的 信號。 DL驅動器/WL驅動器52所包含的DL驅動器係包 含有針對各個數位線DL而設置的數位線驅動電路72。該 數位線驅動電路72係於對應的X解碼電路70的輸出信號 為L位準時,將教位線DL予以放電。亦即,該數位線驅 動電路72係包含有:反相器(inverter)電路IVK1及IVK2, 29 319644 200830313 -係分別接收NAND閘NG1的輸出信號;p通道m〇s電晶 體(絕緣閘極型場效電晶體)PQ1,係根據反相器電路IVK1 •的輸出"is號’將對應的數位線DL結合至電源節點;以及 ,N通道MOS龟晶體NQ1,係根據反相器電路的輸出 信號,將數位線DL結合至接地節點。 ^反相™免路1VK1係將南(high )侧電源節點上的電 £ _低j low )側電源節點(接地節點)上的電壓作為動作 電㈣壓來接收。反相器電路IVK2係將基準電壓Vref作 為门侧%源电麗來接收。因此,反相器電路IVK2的輸出 信號振幅為基準㈣Vref。將基準電壓Vref作為動作電源 電壓供給至該反相器電路IVK2,藉此調節M0S電晶體 NQ1的閘極電壓位準。藉此,調整M〇s電晶體NQi的電 流驅動力,並調整流通數位線DL·的電流量。 於該數位線驅動電路72中,當X解碼電路7〇的輸d 信號為L位準時,反相器電路IVK1及反相器電路μ 的輸出信號會變成Η位準。在該狀態中,Μ 〇 會變成非導通狀態,麵電晶體NQ1會變成導通狀能£ M〇S電晶體NQ1係於閘極接收基準電履Μ ^立準㈣ 並以該基準電壓Vref所規定的電流驅動力將數㈣ 以放電(數位線DL的-端係結合至電源節點)。# 由&通該數位線的電流來感應磁場。 :X解碼電路7 〇的輪出信號為Η位準時,反相器電 M〇S+及1吧的輸出信號皆變為L位率。於該狀態中, 电晶❹'Q1會變成.導通狀態,M〇s電晶體卿會總 319644 30 200830313 •成非導通狀態。因此,數位線DL的兩端結合至電源節點, 而保持於電源電壓(VDD )位準。於該狀態中,由於數位 •線DL未流通電流,故不會感應磁場。 • Y解碼器54係包含有:解碼控制電路73,係共通地 設置於記憶體單元陣列20的位元線;以及Y解碼電路74, 係分別對應位元線BL而設置。解碼控制電路73係包含 有:OR(或)閘OG1,係接收驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN 與讀出指示信號Read;以及AND閘G3,係接收寫入位元 馨線驅動信號W_BL、比較器66的輸出信號P/F、以及寫 入指示信號Write。 驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN係於預讀(pre-read)時 及寫入後的寫入驗證時被活性化。當已指定通常的資料讀 出時,讀出指示信號Read被活性化(驅動至Η位準), 而於進行寫入時的驗證動作(包含預讀)時,驗證讀出活 性化信號VFREN被活性化(驅動至Η位準)。因此,OR 赢閘OG1,係於讀出記憶體單元MC的資料時產生變成活性狀 態的信號。 AND閘G3係於接收的信號全部為活性化狀態(Η位 準)時,產生活性狀態(Η位準)的信號。因此,AND閘 G3於資料窝入時產生用以規定於位元線流通寫入電流的 期間之信號。 Y解碼電路74係包含有:AND閘G4,係接收Y位址 信號YADD ;以及NAND閘NG2,係接收AND閘G3及 , G4的輸出信號。因此,Y解碼電路74係在/ Y位址信號 31 319644 200830313 ‘ YADD已指定對應的位元線BL時,輪出於對應的位元線 流通寫入電流的期間變成活性狀態的信號。 ‘ 位元線驅動器56係包含有對應位元線BL各者而設置 •的位元線驅動電路76。位元線驅動電路76係包含有:反 相器IV3,係將解碼控制電路73的OR閘OG1的輸出信號 予以反相;NAND電路NK1,係接收反相器IV3的輸出信 號與NAND閘NG2的輸出信號;以及NOR (反或)電路 NRK1,係接收OR閘OG1的輸出信號與NAND閘NG2的 _輸出信號。NAND電路NK1係將電源電壓及接地電壓分別 作為高侧電源電壓及低侧電源電壓來接收。NOR電路 NRK1係將基準電壓Vref作為高侧電源電壓來接收。因 此,NAND電路NK1的輪出信號的振幅為電源電壓VDD 位準,另一方面,NOR電路NRK1的輸出信號的振幅為基 準電壓Vref位準。 位元線驅動電路76復包含有:P通道MOS電晶體 ⑩PQ2,係根據NAND電路NK1的輸出信號,將位元線BL 結合至電源節點;以及N通道MOS電晶體NQ2,係根據 NOR電路NRK1的輸出信號,將位元線BL結合至接地節 點。 於資料寫入時,OR閘OG1的輸出信號為L位準,故 反相器IV3的輸出信號為Η位準。當選擇位元線BL流通 寫入電流時,NAND 閘NG2的輸出信號為L位準。於該狀 態中,NAND電路NK1的輸出信號會變成電源電壓位準的 < Η位準,NOR電路NRK1的輸出信號會變成基準電壓Vref 32 319644 200830313 •位準的Η位準。因此,MOS電晶體PQ2會變成非導通狀 態,MOS電晶體NQ2會變成導通狀態。因此,位元線BL •會經由MOS電晶體NQ2放電(位元線BL的一端係結合 •至電源節點)·。經由該位元線BL而從電源節點流入至接 地節點的電流量係藉由供給至MOS電晶體NQ2的閘極的 電壓來設定,亦即,藉由基準電壓Vref的電壓位準來設定。 並且,於資料寫入時,非選擇列的位元線BL由於反 相器IV3的輸出信號變為Η位準,NAND閘G2的輸出信 _號亦變為Η位準,故MOS電晶體PQ2會導通,位元線BL 的兩端結合至電源節點。 於第11圖所示的構成中,讀出放大器58係包含有對 應位元線BL各者而設置的感測放大器(Sense Amplifier ) 電路78。感測放大器電路78係包含有:比較電路CMP, 係比較位元線BL的電壓與讀出基準電壓VRFER ;以及 AND閘G5,係接收解碼控制電路73所包含的OR電路OG1 0的輸出信號以及Y位址解碼電路74所包含的AND閘G4 的輸出信號,而產生用以將比較電路CMP活性化之感測 活性化信號EN 〇 於資料讀出時,解碼電路74的NAND閘G2的輸出信 號為Η位準。因此,於位元線驅動電路76中,NOR電路 NRK1的輸出信號會變成L位準,MOS電晶體NQ2會變 成非導通狀態。此外,於資料讀出時,OR閘OG1的輸出. 信號會變成Η位準,反相器IV3的輸出信號會變成L位 準。因此,NAND電路ΝΚ1的輸出信號會變成Η位準, 33 319644 200830313 M〇S電f曰體_JQ2會變成非導通狀態。 -付,位元線虹的一端係結合至電源節點, 位το線驅動電路76备鐵上&, , ㈢艾成輸出高阻抗狀態。流通該位元線 BL的電流夏係藉由 一 田5己體早to MC的可變雷阻开杜 VR及未圖示的存取雷曰触二^ 包丨兀件 子取電B曰體而放電的電流量來決定。於咸 測放大器電路78中,趑吁A — Ά Τ 將該位儿線BL的電壓與讀出基車+ 壓VREFR進行比釦 -lL处士 、200830313 w9, invention description: [Technical Field] The present invention relates to a magnetic memory, and more particularly to an MTJ (Magnetic Tunneling Junction) component (magnetic tunneling interface component) or The MJT (Magnetic Junction T leg ngmg; magnetic junction tunneling) component (spin tunnel junction element; Spin Tunnel Junction) is used as a memory element for memory. More specifically, the present invention relates to a configuration for ensuring reliability of writing data to an MTJ element _ (MJT element). [Prior Art] As a semiconductor memory device that non-volatilely memorizes data, a flash memory has been known in the past. The memory unit of the flash memory is composed of a laminated positive electrode and a transistor having a control gate and a floating gate (fi〇ating _). According to the amount of accumulated charge of the floating gate, the threshold voltage (threshold v〇ltage) of the memory is changed. The threshold voltage of the memory cell of the body is corresponding to the memory data. When the data is read, a nominal voltage is supplied to the control terminal. Memory unit: 曰 The system will vary in the amount of current flowing depending on its threshold voltage. The data is read out by detecting the current amount of the memory cell of the memory cell. Machine k In the flash memory, the data is written in the following way. According to the data, the charge is moved between the floating gate and the substrate region (the channel region n between the ocean gate and the source/(four) region, and according to the amount of accumulated charge of the coarse or fixed floating gate. Therefore, in the flash The memory and the shaking are set to 'because the charge moves through the insulating film, so the number of writings is 1 (3), the horse is insulated 5 319644 200830313, and the characteristics of the film are limited. In addition, the data is moved by the electric charge. Write, so there is a problem of long data write time and long access time. In order to solve this problem of flash memory, MRAM (Magneto) with short access time and unlimited number of rewrites has been developed. -Resistive Random-Access Memory. This MRAM uses a variable magnetic resistance element as a memory cell element. In the variable magnetic resistance element, it is called a free layer and fixed. The laminated structure of the magnetic bodies of the layers. The resistance values of the magnetization directions of the magnetic bodies are different, and the data is memorized according to the resistance values. As the MRAM, in the conventional current magnetic field writing mode MRAM When the data is written, the current flows to the mutually orthogonal digit line and the bit line. The pig is set by the combined magnetic field of the magnetic field induced by the current flowing through the digit line and the bit line. The magnetization direction of the free layer of the variable magnetic resistance element (MTJ element (magnetic tunneling junction element). The magnetization direction of the fixed layer is fixed in a certain direction regardless of the applied magnetic field. 0 In this conventional MRAM, In order to generate the magnetic field required for rewriting, a certain amount of current is required. Therefore, as the memory unit is characterized, the width of the power supply line is also reduced, and thus the current required to generate the magnetic field is also increased. When P is miniaturized, the distance between the variable magnetic resistance elements of the memory unit is also small. Due to the leakage magnetic field applied to the magnetic field of the selected memory unit, the memory data of the non-selected memory unit is changed. In addition, in the memory unit of the current magnetic field writing method, the easy axis of magnetization is arranged in parallel with the bit line or the digit 6 319644 200830313 w line. To this. 愔勒·^ μ ^ ^, first down 'in the + select state (select the state of the digit line or bit line) but the + touch a + + especially k, body early tl, due to the circulation of the digit line Or the bit-line error induced by the current of the bit-line is a problem of the one-axis interference (distuTb) that reverses its memory data. As a mram that has to overcome this one-axis interference problem, Developed a dual L-toggle MRAM and a spin-injection magnetization inversion write mode MRAM (Spin-Torque Tmnsfer RAM; hereinafter referred to as spin injection type ΑΜ). r The easy magnetization axis and the hard magnetization axis of the memory element of the memory cell in the two-state thixotropic MRAM are arranged to be 45 with the digit line and the bit line. angle. In addition, a free layer is formed by a SAF (synthetic antiferromagnetic) structure. In the SAF structure, two ferromagnetic layers are disposed with an antiferromagnetic light layer interposed therebetween. When the data is written, the timing of the current flowing through the digit line and the bit line is shifted, and the magnetization of the free layer is rotated. Since the magnetization direction of the free layer is rotated by using both the digit line and the bit line, even if a leakage magnetic field from one axis (digit line or bit line) is applied, the magnetization direction of the free layer does not rotate. Can eliminate the problem of one-axis interference. In the spin injection type magnetization inversion writing type MRAM (spin injection type MRAM), the spin polarization direction of electrons passing through the pinned layer is set by the magnetization direction of the pinned layer. The electric current that has determined the direction of the spin polarization is introduced into or extracted from the free layer, thereby adjusting the self-polarization direction of the electrons of the free layer to set the magnetization direction of the free layer.自In the spin called spin-torque transfer random access memory, the main type 7 319644 7 200830313 MRAM 'when writing' current will be freely magnetic via the memory unit and 70 pieces (MT J TG pieces) and circulate. Therefore, since the magnetic field is not generated by the use of the electron spin, the problem of the one-axis interference can be eliminated. The memory device has a plurality of memory cells. For example, in a memory device having a memory capacity of one megabit, a memory cell of about 1 〇〇 = memory is provided. There is a subtle bias between these multiple memory cells. Therefore, in the case where all of the memory cells are rewritten with the same conditions, it is necessary to set a region in which the rewritable ranges of the plurality of memory cells overlap each other as a rewriting condition. Therefore, the writing conditions for writing will become narrower, and the probability of writing bad people will be used to write whether the data has been correctly written when the bedding is written =: verification one action, always flashing In the memory, in the ίli literature 1 (曰本特开平平- 10-302487) ^...Into the verification action, when writing the data and writing the object of the memory, the memory is stopped, after the stop people. The verification operation is performed every time the nest is performed, and the writing and verification actions are performed in advance; 'until the memory data of the memory unit of the writing object and the writing material _f are written. Change the write pulse width and write each time you write. When the verification is performed for a predetermined number of times and the data is not correctly written: The memory unit of the object is regarded as defective. It is known that the invention of Patent Document 1 performs write and write verification interactively. 319644 8 200830313 , This stops for the memory unit that does not need to be written, 隹/一亚对母位元«丁记忆单位的In the case of the memory, in the memory, in the memory, after writing, the person is authenticated to determine whether the memory cell: the critical value of the crystal (threshGld) is In the reservation, around. When the person writes again after the test, the user will change the write wave and/or the pulse wave and perform the writing. , Zeng Zhuan, the invention of Document 2 maintains the critical electric castle distribution width of the written memory unit within a predetermined range, and widens the difference between the threshold voltage after writing and the eliminated threshold voltage to seek The characteristic deterioration of the memory device is suppressed. Patent Document 3 (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2004-22112) discloses a flash memory for the purpose of performing page pr graming at high speed. In the configuration shown in Patent Document 3, the writing and verification in units of pages are performed for one page of data, and the writing after the writing is stopped for each unit that has finished writing. . The invention of Patent Document 3 is repeatedly written and verified in a plurality of address units. Compared with the case of writing and verifying readout at each address, it is necessary to shorten the time required for programming and realize high-speed page programming. Further, Patent Document 4 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2003-346484) discloses a charge trapping type f® body for performing an insulation test. In the configuration shown in the special document 4, after writing the certificate, the pin 9 319644 200830313 t adjusts the write voltage level to the memory unit having a bad write and performs rewriting. The write = verification number is set to t maximum value, and when the target unit is still defective even if the maximum value is reached, it is judged that the memory unit is defective. 1 (4) by writing and verifying, the number of writes to the pulse wave is reduced (4) to prevent the application of excessive write pulse waves to the insulating film of the etched transistor (NROM cell transistor). Maintain reliability. - In addition, in the special contribution 4, 'there is a step in the process of re-introduction: the incursion does not prevent the application of excessive (four) to the memory element (NROM transistor). 5 (Japan Special Kaiping 〗 〖. Milk is a bulletin) is a view of revealing one: the maximum time required for the purpose of the flash memory, the lack of composition, in the test mode neck, two pre-, fixed The maximum number of verifications is performed in the memory of the nest and the second is completed. When the maximum number of writes/verifications is completed, the busy stone is sent to the external bus BUSY. By observing the busy letter in the outside, the second is fine. Programming time as a specification value is not intended to simplify the design of the system. Bao Ye and 2 Document 6 (曰本特开平(10)面) - a flash memory with long beak material writing time. Special contribution (4) Finding intrusion From the π 士 an ^ f ~ x 献 6, it is judged whether the write current value of the entrant flow is smaller than the λ λ from the soil value. , the mouth is judged 舄 ' '" 丨 L edge is smaller than the judgment value, stop Jingjin = after the data is written, from the write object Memory 2: 1 row verification operation is necessary, and shortening the writing time is required to continue the Beccoli document 7 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2) 319644 10 200830313 'A type is performed in phase change memory The configuration of the write and write verification. The invention of Patent Document 7 writes a memory cell in a reset state in a high resistance state, that is, writes to the phase change memory. In the cell, the memory value of the phase change memory cell of the write target is read and compared with the written data. When the comparison result is inconsistent, the write current is supplied. The write current amount is repeated each time the write is repeated. The invention of Patent Document 7 is in the phase change memory unit, that is, the contact area between the lower electrode and the phase change element is deviated, and the resistance value is deviated due to incomplete non-crystallization. In order to prevent erroneous reading of data, that is, repeating the writing and writing verification, the phase change of the reset state is set to a predetermined value or more regardless of the phase value of the reset unit. The size of the contact area between the variator and the lower electrode is reduced, and the variation in the resistance value is reduced. Patent Document 8 (JP-A-2004-362761) discloses a configuration for performing writing and verification in a phase change memory unit. Patent Document 8 According to the invention, when the writing is performed in the set state of the phase change memory cell toward the low resistance, the resistance value of the memory cell in the set state depends on the resistance value in the reset state, thereby preventing the occurrence of the resistance. In the case of writing in the set state, the bit line voltage is monitored, and when the bit line voltage reaches a predetermined reference voltage, writing to the set state is stopped. When the bit line voltage is changed from the reference voltage, it indicates that the memory cell to be written has become a low resistance setting state. Thereby, the deviation of the resistance value of 11 319644 200830313 * in the set state after writing to the memory unit is suppressed. The above-mentioned Patent Documents 丨 to 8 show a configuration in which (4) is written to stabilize the writing of the memory of the phase change memory. That is to say, in the special: 1, the write verification of the memory unit is first performed, and then the result of the fresh verification is pure (4). When the stock certificate (4) line == time ^ writes the time width of the pulse wave, and controls the amount of injected charge U of the floating gate, the composition shown in the special offer will be the object, when the writer is written, Note that there is a floating charge (the electronic boundary is the same as the voltage. Therefore, when t is rewritten, the state of the cell is different from that of the case of the Lie, so in order to reduce the deviation of the threshold voltage after writing, it is required to skillfully Adjust the write pulse width to write. The other side: In the case of MR^AM, 'When the write is bad, the memory cell after writing is the same as before the write, and the start state is the same. Therefore, as shown in the patent document, when the write pulse width is slightly adjusted and the writing is repeated, the number of write/write verifications is increased instead, so that the writing time may become long. Therefore, the configuration of Patent Document i cannot be directly applied to the MARM. In the configuration of Patent Document 2, in a rewritable memory cell (NROM cell), charges are trapped in the insulating film, and the memory cell transistor is adjusted. Threshold voltage. Therefore, accumulation at the insulating film during writing Since the charge voltage is changed, the threshold voltage of the memory cell changes every time it is written. Therefore, Patent Document 2 cannot be directly applied to, for example, MRAM, and when the write failure occurs, the memory unit is restored to the pre-write state. Memory device of the state. 12 319644 200830313 ' ^ Patent Document 3, although page programming is shown, the charge voltage of the (four) pole is changed to cause the threshold voltage of the memory cell transistor to change and eat-remember data. In the same manner as the patent documents 丨 and 2, it is not possible to directly apply the data writing of the two 'MRAM'. The patent document 4 shows the write verification in the flash memory. However, in Patent Document 4, each write is performed. The critical electric enthalpy of the human-time memory cell transistor also changes. Therefore, the constitutional method of Patent Document 4 is applied to the write configuration of the MRAM. The patent document 5 is written only during the maximum programming time in the test mode. And the verification and the maximum programming time at the time of writing can be observed externally in the test mode. Therefore, in the configuration shown in Patent Document 5, it is recorded as a flash memory unit, each time When a person, a single memory ⑽ = voltage will change. Accordingly, also designed to be objective for offering 5_ not suitable for direct 〃 iv written into memory cell will not restored to the original state like) constituting the MRAM. C Original In the configuration shown in Patent Document 6, the write completion is monitored at the time of data writing. Therefore, Patent Document 6 (4) Μ Μ 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始 始This memory =: Inverted write mode of the spin torque transfer random deposit -, 'in the type of MRAM, according to the logic of the written data, 7 series shows the phase change memory unit write and test 319644 13 200830313, card. In the phase change memory unit, the resistance value of the high resistance reset state depends on the resistance value in the set state of the low resistance state, and the resistance value of the set-state memory cell depends on the reset state. The resistance value of the memory is 1 yuan. In the MRAM, there is no dependence on the directness of the resistance value of the memory cell before data writing and the resistance value of the memory cell after data writing. Therefore, in the MRAM, in the case where the size of the write current is changed every time the write verification is performed, the write current is supplied after the completion of the write, and the unnecessary write is generated. Therefore, the writing sequence of Patent Document 7 cannot be directly applied to the MRAM. In the configuration shown in Patent Document 8, the bit line voltage of the phase change memory unit is changed to a predetermined reference voltage. Therefore, as in the case of the two-state thixotropic MRAM, the configuration shown in Patent Document 8 cannot be applied in the case where a constant current is flown regardless of whether or not it is in the write state. Similarly, in the spin injection type MRAM, the direction of the electric current flowing through the bit line is different each time the data is written, so that the phase change memory of the bit line current flows in one direction as shown in Patent Document 8 The write order cannot be applied to MRAM. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide an MRAM capable of correctly writing data. Another object of the present invention is to provide a two-state thixotropic MRAM or a spin injection MRAM capable of stably writing data. MRAM without any axis interference In short, the magnetic and memory (non-volatile magnetic memory 14 319644 200830313 -) of the present invention is a data write and verifier when the feed is written. When the poor material write failure is detected at the time of verification, the memory cell becomes the same complaint as before the write, and is rewritten from the same state as before the write. That is, in one embodiment of the present invention, the magnetic memory system 2 includes a plurality of memory cells, and the write system circuit writes the written data into the plurality of memory cells to be written. The memory unit; the horse enters the control circuit, compares the memory data of the written object with the written material. Each of the plurality of memory cells includes a variable magnetic resistance element and the data is memorized by the resistance value of the variable magnetic resistance element. The write circuit is a memory unit that writes the data to the person to be written, and stores the data and data of the memory unit of the object. According to the rut and the fruit, the write circuit selectively performs writing for the memory unit to be inserted. When the memory cell to be written is rewritten, rewriting is performed from the same initial state as before writing. In the present invention, it is checked whether or not the writing has been correctly performed. Port = This suppression results in poor data writing and can achieve high reliability. In addition, a badly written memory unit is re-injected from the same state as the previous write. Therefore, in the consistent mode, the write condition of 2% at the time of each write enables the rewrite to be performed according to the characteristics of the memory cell, and accurate rewriting can be realized. 319644 15 200830313 • [Embodiment] The following is a schematic view of a preferred embodiment of the present invention. • "Construction principle", the configuration of the variable magnetic resistance element of the memory unit. Fig. 1 schematically shows the two-state thixotropic unit used as the variable magnetic land resistance element VR included in the memory unit. The structure of J Yuan. In Fig. 1, the variable magnetic resistance element is further comprised of a free layer 1, a pinning layer (])] [11116 (11 lamps > 2, and a setting 10 in the free layer 1 and pinning) a tunneling barrier layer (layer) between the layers 2. The free layer 1 includes a ferromagnetic film fmi, fm2 having substantially the same magnetic moment, and a non-magnetic film af. It is placed between the ferromagnetic film: FM1 and FM2. The free layer 1 is an anti-parallel coupling element (SAF) with two ferromagnetic films FM1 and FM2 sandwiching the non-magnetic layer AF in the middle of the three-layer structure. In the middle, the non-magnetic layer AF acts as an antiferromagnetic bonding layer. In the state where no magnetic field is applied, the magnetization steep films FM1 and FM2 are opposite in direction (anti-parallel state) due to the exchange of filial piety. The pinning layer 2 is composed of, for example, a ferromagnetic film and an antiferromagnetic film, and the magnetization direction is fixed irrespective of the direction in which the magnetic field is applied due to the antiferromagnetic exchange coupling. According to the magnetization direction of the ferromagnetic film FM2 and the pinning layer 2 The variable magnetic resistance element V is in the same direction (parallel state) or anti-parallel state The resistance value of R (MJT component: SaVChENKO MJT component) will be different. The resistance value corresponds to the binary value information. In the state where no magnetic field is applied, the magnetization of the free layer 1 and the pinning layer 2 is 16 319644 200830313. The direction does not change. In addition, the information is memorized only in accordance with the magnetization direction. Therefore, the data can be stored non-volatilely without affecting the leakage current, etc. - Fig. 2 schematically shows the array of the variable magnetic resistance element VR The bit line is pulled and the digit line DL is set for the variable magnetic resistance element VR. The bit line and the digit line DL are arranged to be orthogonal to each other. The easy magnetic (four) system of the variable magnetic resistance element VR is substantially The vertical line BL and the digit line DL are 45. The variable magnetic resistance element VR is supplied in an angular manner. In a state where no magnetic field is applied, the magnetization direction of the variable magnetic electric resistance element VR is along the direction of the easy magnetization axis. A hard magnetic axis is present in a direction orthogonal to the easy axis of magnetization. Fig. 3 is a view showing the magnetization rotation order of the MJT element when the data of the two-state thixotropic MRAM cell is written. Hereinafter, the data writing operation of the έ 忆 体 unit will be described with reference to Fig. 3 . First, in the period # ,, the digit line DL and the bit line BL do not flow current. Therefore, in the variable magnetic resistance element VR, the magnetization direction of the free layer is set and maintained in accordance with the easy magnetization axis XE. In the period #1, only the digit line DL flows current. Thereby, the magnetic field H1 is generated along the extending direction of the bit line. By the magnetic field H1, the exchange coupling in the free layer collapses (spin fl〇p state), and the combined magnetic fields of the two ferromagnetic films (FM1, FM2) of the free layer become the induced magnetic field H1. For the same direction. In the period #2, in the state where the digit line DL flows current, the line BL flows a current. In this case, due to the current of the bit line bl, the magnetic field H2 is generated in a direction parallel to the direction in which the digit line extends. The magnetization of the 17 319644 200830313 y solid magnetic film of the free layer rotates, so that the combined magnetic field of the magnetic fields m and H2 and the resultant magnetic field of the free layer become the same direction. ώIn the period #3, the current of the digit line DL is turned off, and only the bit line BL 2 is turned on. In this case, only the magnetic field H2 is generated in the direction of the digit line DL. Therefore, the resultant magnetic field of the free layer becomes the same direction as the induced magnetic field H2 of the bit line electric & the magnetization of the free layer re-rotates. In the period #4, the current supply of the bit line BL is cut off. At this time, the number and line DL are not supplied with current. In this case, in the free layer, the magnetization of the free layer is dominated by the replacement of the light. The magnetization of the free layer is aligned with the easy magnetization and reversed. In the period # 〇 and period # 4, the magnetization direction of the free layer is reversed. The resistance of the variable magnetic resistance element vr (Savchenk 元件 element) will be based on the free layer! The ferromagnetic film web 2 and the magnetization direction of the pinned layer 2 are set. Therefore, in the period #〇 and period #4, the resistance value of the variable magnetic resistance element VR changes, and the binary data can be memorized. As described above, in the two-state thixotropic MRAM>, it is possible to write a person's data by using a unipolar current. In the order of writing, the initial state of the variable magnetic resistance element is free in the writing order, layer = magnetization = 18 向 to the suspect. . Therefore, when the data is written to the memory unit, the magnetization direction of the variable magnetic resistance element of the memory unit is reversed only when the memory data and the data are written. Further, in the variable magnetic resistance element, the easy magnetization axis has 45 for the bit line and the digit line through which the write current flows. Angle. Therefore, bit inversion cannot be performed with only one power supply line, so the problem of -axis interference 319644 18 200830313 • does not occur. However, when the external magnetic magnetic film is aligned with the external magnetic corpse and is reported to be strong, the two of the free layers will not be aligned to the second. When the magnetic field strength is reduced, this is appropriately written into the magnetic field system. There is a Bu, Beike into the day, more powerful than the strength of the magnetic field of Jiang Baiwei' and the strength of the two magnetisms of the free layer is less. The magnetization of the membrane is stronger toward the magnetic field in the same direction. When the data is written, the hopper bin + uses the current pulse of the early polarity, and the part of the sputum input and the electric current can be simplified. The structure of the variable magnetic resistance element 2 ·· The figure of the 4 shows the tile纟I,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, The structure of the material is changed from ^^. The variable magnetic resistance element VR is composed of bribe elements, 匕δ has free layer 11, pinning sound 12, ["Fen you recognize 丄ρ The glazing layer 12 and the tunneling insulating film 丨3 between the free layer 11 and the pinning layer 12. The free layer 11 and the pinned layer 12 are composed of a ferromagnetic body. In the variable magnetic resistance element VR, when electrons flow from the needle layer 12 into the insulating film 13, the spin directions of the electrons are made uniform. By the spin torque action of the electrons in the spin direction at this time, the spin directions of the electrons of the free layer 11 are made uniform to set the magnetization direction. In the mjt θ element, the resistance value of the magnetization direction of the free layer 11 and the pinning layer 12 is also different, and the data is memorized based on the resistance value. In the following description, the magnetic field-resistive element of the current magnetic field inversion type is referred to as an MTJ element, and the magnetic resistance element of the spin-injected magnetic field inversion type is referred to as 319644 19 200830313 as an MJT element. Figs. 5(A) and 5(B) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of current when the data of the MJT element shown in Fig. 4 is written. In the figure (8) • the medium write current IW flows from the pinning layer 12 toward the free layer u. In this case, when the electrons e flow from the free layer 1 of the age-bearing layer 12, the direction of the spin-bias of the spin-direction layer 12 is different, and the spin of the electron of the free layer u is reflected by the J-edge film 13 The direction changes to the opposite direction of the pinned layer 12. It has the same spin as the spin biasing direction of her layer 12, and the electron e of the pole passes through the pinning layer 12. Therefore, in the free layer 11, the magnetization direction is set to a direction opposite to the magnetization direction of the pinned layer 12 by the transmission of the spin torque. " In the nuclear state, the magnetization directions of the free layer and the pinned layer 12 are in an anti-parallel direction, which is a high resistance state. This state corresponds, for example, to a state in which the memory information is "H" (logic high level). In Fig. 5(B), the write current Iw flows from the free layer jj to the pinion=layer 12. In this case, the electrons flow from the pinning layer toward the free layer n. The spin polarization direction of the electron e is aligned to the spin biasing direction of the pinning layer 12. Therefore, the electrons e injected into the free layer u via the tunneling insulating film 13 have the same spin biasing direction as the spin biasing direction of the pinning layer 12, and the 'free layer 11 is magnetized and bonded to the pinning layer. The magnetization direction of 12 is the same direction. This state is a low resistance state, and corresponds to, for example, a state in which the memory material is "L" (logic low level). When the main lean material is read, the read current flows from the free layer 11 toward the pinned layer 12. In this case, the read current is set to be much smaller than the write current so that the magnetization direction of the free layer 11 is not reversed due to the read current. 20 319644 200830313. In the case of the variable magnetic one shown in Fig. 4, it is preferable to enter a few pieces of VR, and the Beca write % does not use the current induced magnetic field. That is, Mram 疋 T injected into the magnetization inversion writing mode <堇 Supply current to early selection. Therefore, in the memory unit of the semi-selected state, the write = stream does not flow 'and the scene is not present, so the problem of a cypress is fully controlled. These section components and bribe components can constitute a memory that does not cause a single axis interference. In the present invention, the data writing in the MRAM without the axis interference is stabilized by the Eucalyptus and the 碟. The figure of the figure shows the overall principle of the magnetic memory of the present invention. In Fig. 6, the magnetic memory system includes memory cells [memory cell arrays arranged in a matrix] 2c> the memory cells may contain the MTJ components shown in Figs. 1 and 4 And any of the MJT components are constructed as § recall elements. The present invention can be applied to the two-state thixotropic MRAM cell shown in Fig. 4 and the spin injection MRAM cell shown in Fig. 4. The second magnetic memory has also included: a write system circuit 22 for writing data to the memory unit 70 MC; a read system circuit 23 for performing a material on the memory unit; and a write control circuit 24 controls the writing operation of the write system circuit 22. The write system circuit 22 supplies a write current for writing data to the memory unit to be written in accordance with the write data WD. Therefore, the write-in system 22 is different in accordance with the memory unit MC being a two-state thixotropy 21 319644 200830313 MRAM and a spin injection type MRAM. Here, the write second (four) way 22 supplies a write current to the memory early MC of the write target, and the resistance value of the variable magnetic resistance element 2 of the set memory unit Mc is set. The specific configuration of the write system circuit 22 will be described later. The details of the embodiments will be described in detail. The circuit 23 supplies a read current to the selected body when the data is read. The readout of the memory cell based on the current value is different. The current is generated in the readout system circuit 23 to generate the I purchase data RD. The intrusion control circuit 24 reads the memory data RD from the write memory unit MC via the readout system circuit 23, and determines that the logical level of the read secondary ancestor RD and the written data WD are identical or different; the determination result indicates In the case of poor write, the write is performed according to the written data: the two memory cells are written. The configuration of the writer control circuit 亦 will also be described in detail in the respective embodiments described. And /s Fig. 7 is a flow chart showing the writing operation when the magnetic recording 雔a MRAM shown in Fig. 6 is displayed. Figure 8 shows the magnetic memory of the first::: The spin injection MRAM should not be a flow chart. Hereinafter, the order of writing operations of the magnetic memory of Fig. 7. and Fig. δ is referred to, respectively. First, referring to Fig. 7, the data writing sequence in the state of the thixotropic MRAM shown in Fig. 6 will be described. The body is double. The write control circuit 24 monitors an external command from a not shown, and 22 319644 200830313 - determines whether the command has been designated and waits for receive write = two). Write control circuit • So far. ‘·’, 曰 until the specified data is written to " when the designated data is appropriate.士 ^ eDonkey? 3. The input control circuit 24 prepares the circuit 23 to read out the memory unit "the RD RD of the sector read system unit (step S2). The data RD virtual socket a - = whether the alignment is the same (step S3). When writing the pair of = fat milk memory data ribs and writing data toe logic: f memory unit to the memory of the intrusion The unit writes. When the same, do not believe the other side 'When the write data WD and the read data P value are different, the logic for writing the data to the written object is entered. The write control circuit 24 is based on: (step S4). The input circuit 24. _,,, and 吉果 drive the write and write by the write system 22 to write the data to the write target, and then write The control circuit takes two memory data of the memory unit of the body unit MC image (step S5), and the write pair performs the pre-reading with step S2 (pre_r in step S5) and returns to step S3 again to determine the read data. RD and one. After the value is - or not - repeat the steps ϋ the data WD side until the data WD is written The operation of the data RD is performed in the light step %. Referring to Fig. 8, the value of Fig. 6 is shown as the soil. The data is written in the spin injection type MRAM. No Ck rhyme intrusion control circuit 24 monitoring From the neighbor Q 1 to know, and determine whether '· 319644 23 200830313. Received an instruction to indicate the write (step s1 。). When the indicated data is written, the write system 22 will control the circuit 24兮 悔 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ According to the write control circuit 24, the memory data of the memory unit of the person object is called (step material, the write control circuit 24 performs a judgment read (10) whether the logic values of the bedding material WD match (step S13). When the result of the determination is said to be the same, the writing of the data to the writing unit is ended. On the other hand, if the logical values of the materials do not match, the process returns to step su again, and the data of the input memory unit is written. Repeat the steps to = • verify the action until the write The memory value of the object's memory is the same as the logical value of the material RD and the written data.). As shown in Figure 7 and Figure 8, the memory of the memory unit of the object is entered when the data is written. After the data and write: = out:, the reliability of writing to the memory unit of the write target is reliably stopped for the memory unit of the write target. And this guarantee is $9. Figures (A) to (C) show the map of the Gentleman's Gentleman and the probability of bad occurrence. In Figure 9 (A) to, ", 4 inch [), the upper side of the 319644 24 200830313 graphic system Less than the write characteristics of the memory of the early memory, the lower side of the system does not produce a probability. In the graphs showing the write characteristics and the probability of occurrence of defects, the magnitudes of the write magnetic fields are displayed in accordance with each other. Further, in Fig. 9 (a) and (C), the rewriting conditions of the unit for the probability of occurrence of 1 FIT failure are shown. ratio! The writing conditions for the probability of occurrence of a large defect are slanted: 1 FIT indicates that a defect occurred at 1 〇 5 hours (100,000 hours). _ The MRAM cell will be in the same state as the previous write (the magnetization direction is parallel or anti-parallel). The cell basically uses the magnetic polarization of the magnetic body to become the source of the magnetic polarization. In the spin-polarization of electrons, the direction of the spin-feeding precession changes probabilistically due to the influence of heat. Therefore, as shown in Fig. (a) to (C), even if written under the same conditions In, because the mouth is increased by the number of times, the possibility of writing a bad person is reduced. D... and the writing condition is changed every time the writing is performed, thereby making the same in each of the fine elements and the smoothing elements. When the writing is performed, the condition of the human memory unit is written correctly, so that the anti-parallel state and the parallel direction of the variable magnetic resistance of the memory unit can be surely entered when the component is changed. The middle row of the state = two in' but the parallel state or the anti-parallel state before the write is entered: therefore, the initial state at the time of rewriting is the same, - and the problem of excessive intrusion is considered. Will not pass the sound Into, so there is no need to make the threshold voltage 曰 . 行 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 And the correct writing can be performed in a short time. As described above, according to the present invention, when the data is written, the verification operation of whether or not the writing material has been correctly written is performed. Therefore, even the memory list is included. In the case where the characteristics of the element are changed, the correct writing can be ensured. [Embodiment 1] Fig. 1 is a view schematically showing the overall configuration of the two-state thixotropic MRAM according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The memory cells MC are arranged in a matrix in the memory cell array 20. The row lines corresponding to the memory cells are provided with bit lines BL, and the row corresponding to the memory cells MC is provided with The digit line DL and the word line WL. The memory unit MC includes a variable magnetic resistance element VR (ΜΊ7 element) and an access transistor TRS connected in series with the variable magnetic resistance element VR. Crystal TRS is tied to the corresponding word When WL is selected, it is turned on, and the variable magnetic resistance element VR is coupled to the source line (represented by the ground node). When the data is written, the word line WL is in a non-selected state, and the 10 access transistor TRS is in a non-conducting state. The variable magnetic resistance element VR is arranged so as to correspond to the intersection of the digit line DL and the bit line BL. The digit line DL is connected to the power supply node at one end, and one end of the |yuan line BL is also coupled to the power supply node. The input control circuit 24 includes an instruction decoder 62 that decodes an instruction received via the connection pad PAD to generate a write instruction signal Write and a read instruction signal Read, and a timing generator 64. Generating a write bit line drive signal W_BL and a timing control signal for writing a bit line to drive 26 319644 200830313 'motion signal w_DL, etc. according to an operation mode indication signal from the instruction decoder 62; and a comparator (4) from the memory unit Array 2 〇 选 扪 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择 择Line comparison. ^ TO 65: The sequence generation 64 system is composed of, for example, a sequence controller (_ _tr〇ller), and controls the writing of the data to the decibel-out operation according to a predetermined order. In Fig. 1G, a control signal associated with writing is generated in the sequence generator 64. The #write system circuit 2 includes an X decoder 50 set for the digits and the word line machine, and an IO drive crying/WT trace WL and a bit 绫 state 52' set for the bit line BL·. And a pin-shaped bit line driver 56 and a Y decoder 54. The X decoder 50 decodes the internal address mark ADD (X address signal) from the address latch 69 to generate a signal for specifying the memory cell row of the ^ address. The DL driver/WL driver 52 drives the digit line and word line fox based on the memory cell row designation signal from the acknowledgment and the write enable indication signal from the timing generator. In the case of data writing, the driver and the /WL driver 52 form a discharge path corresponding to the selected memory cell, the digit line DL. Thereby, in selecting the memory bank: the digit line DL, the current flows from the power source node to the ground node via the DL driver. The driver is configured to be in the selected state when the data is read out corresponding to the row of the memory cells that have been designated. Thus, in the selected memory cell, the access transistor TRS is turned on, and the current path is formed between the bit line BL and the source line (ground node) = 319644 27 200830313 Y decoder 54 receives the latch from the address The internal address number ADD (Y address signal) of the device 69 generates a signal for selecting the memory cell column of the memory cell array 20 that has been designated. The bit line driver 56 discharges the selected bit line when the data is written. When the bit field machine is in the non-selected state, the bit line driver (6) maintains the non-selected bit line BL at the (four) (four) level. At the time of data reading, the bit line driver 56 becomes an output high impedance (_-dan state. The sense amplifier 58 is connected to the selected bit line when reading the data, and compared with the reference value (electrical comparison) And an internal signal for indicating the memory data of the memory early MC. For example, the ★selling amplifier compares the voltage of the current flowing through the selected bit line to the voltage. The reference voltage in the amplifier 58, the reference voltage for specifying the amount of discharge current of the bit driver 56, and the reference voltage for specifying the amount of discharge current of the digit line DL of the DL driver are generated by the heart rate generating circuit 60. Further, the input data latch 65 reads the input data DJ supplied to the connection pad pAD to generate internal write data. The output data latch reads the material read from the sense amplifier 58, And the external read data D0 is rotated through the corresponding connection pad. The address latch 69 is latched from the external address signal AD provided by the connection pad, and generates an internal address signal AD (X And gamma address signals. The latch timing of these flash locks is set by the timing generator 64. When the instruction specifies the access mode 319644 28 200830313 * (data write or read mode), the timing generator Under the control of 64, these latches 65, 67, 69 will become latched. - Fig. 11 is a view showing more specifically the configuration of the main portion of the two-state thixotropic-MRAM shown in Fig. 10. In the figure, the configuration of the portion associated with the bit line BL and the bit line DL provided in the memory cell array 20 is representatively displayed. In Fig. 11, the X decoder 50 includes digital bit line decoding. The circuit 70 is corresponding to the digit line DL rain setting. The digit line decoding circuit 70 includes _ contains: AND gate G1, which generates an activation signal when writing; AND gate G2, which is an X address signal XADD Decoding; and NAND (reverse) gate NG1, according to the output signals of these AND gates G1 and G2, generate signals for selecting corresponding digit lines. AND gate G1 receives and writes digit line drive signals W_DL, The output signal P/F of the comparator 66 and the write indication signal Write.AND G2 receives the X address signal XADD and generates an active state signal when the X address signal XADD_ specifies the corresponding digit line address. The output signals of the NAND gate NG1 to these AND gates G1 and G2 are active. In the state (Ή level), a signal of an active state (L level) is generated. The DL driver included in the DL driver/WL driver 52 includes a bit line driving circuit 72 provided for each digit line DL. The drive circuit 72 discharges the teaching bit line DL when the output signal of the corresponding X decoding circuit 70 is at the L level. That is, the digit line driver circuit 72 includes: inverter circuits IVK1 and IVK2, 29 319644 200830313 - respectively receiving the output signal of the NAND gate NG1; p-channel m〇s transistor (insulated gate type) Field effect transistor) PQ1, according to the output of the inverter circuit IVK1 • "is number' to the corresponding digit line DL to the power supply node; and, N channel MOS turtle crystal NQ1, according to the output of the inverter circuit The signal combines the digit line DL to the ground node. ^ Inverted TM Freeway 1VK1 receives the voltage on the power supply node (ground node) on the south (high) side power supply node as the operating power (four) voltage. The inverter circuit IVK2 receives the reference voltage Vref as a gate side source. Therefore, the output signal amplitude of the inverter circuit IVK2 is the reference (four) Vref. The reference voltage Vref is supplied as the operating power supply voltage to the inverter circuit IVK2, thereby adjusting the gate voltage level of the MOS transistor NQ1. Thereby, the current driving force of the M〇s transistor NQi is adjusted, and the amount of current flowing through the digit line DL· is adjusted. In the digit line drive circuit 72, when the d signal of the X decoding circuit 7 is L level, the output signals of the inverter circuit IVK1 and the inverter circuit μ become the Η level. In this state, Μ 〇 will become non-conducting, and the surface transistor NQ1 will become conductive. The M 〇S transistor NQ1 is connected to the gate receiving reference Μ 立 立 (4) and is specified by the reference voltage Vref. The current driving force is the number (four) to discharge (the end line of the digit line DL is coupled to the power supply node). # From & pass the current of the digit line to induce a magnetic field. : When the turn-out signal of the X decoding circuit 7 is clamped, the output signals of the inverters M〇S+ and 1 become the L-bit rate. In this state, the electro-crystal ❹ 'Q1 will become the conduction state, and the M 〇 晶晶晶 will total 319644 30 200830313 • become non-conducting state. Therefore, both ends of the digit line DL are coupled to the power supply node while remaining at the power supply voltage (VDD) level. In this state, since the digital line DL does not have a current flowing, the magnetic field is not induced. The Y decoder 54 includes a decoding control circuit 73 that is commonly provided in the bit line of the memory cell array 20, and a Y decoding circuit 74 that is provided corresponding to the bit line BL. The decoding control circuit 73 includes an OR gate OG1, a reception verification read activation signal VFREN and a read instruction signal Read, and an AND gate G3, a reception bit bit line drive signal W_BL, and a comparator. The output signal P/F of 66 and the write indication signal Write. The verification read activation signal VFREN is activated at the time of pre-read and write verification after writing. When the normal data reading has been designated, the read instruction signal Read is activated (driving to the Η level), and when the verifying operation (including the pre-reading) is performed, the verification read activation signal VFREN is verified. Activation (driving to Η level). Therefore, the OR win gate OG1 generates a signal that becomes an active state when the data of the memory cell MC is read. The AND gate G3 generates a signal of an active state (Η level) when all of the received signals are in an activated state (Η position). Therefore, the AND gate G3 generates a signal for specifying a period during which the write current flows through the bit line when the data is inserted. The Y decoding circuit 74 includes an AND gate G4 that receives the Y address signal YADD and a NAND gate NG2 that receives the output signals of the AND gates G3 and G4. Therefore, the Y decoding circuit 74 is a signal in which the wheel becomes active during the period in which the write current flows through the corresponding bit line when the /Y address signal 31 319644 200830313 ‘YADD has designated the corresponding bit line BL. The bit line driver 56 includes a bit line driving circuit 76 provided with each of the corresponding bit lines BL. The bit line driving circuit 76 includes an inverter IV3 that inverts an output signal of the OR gate OG1 of the decoding control circuit 73, and a NAND circuit NK1 that receives an output signal of the inverter IV3 and the NAND gate NG2. The output signal; and the NOR (reverse OR) circuit NRK1 receives the output signal of the OR gate OG1 and the _ output signal of the NAND gate NG2. The NAND circuit NK1 receives the power supply voltage and the ground voltage as the high side power supply voltage and the low side power supply voltage, respectively. The NOR circuit NRK1 receives the reference voltage Vref as a high side power supply voltage. Therefore, the amplitude of the round-out signal of the NAND circuit NK1 is the power supply voltage VDD level, and the amplitude of the output signal of the NOR circuit NRK1 is the reference voltage Vref level. The bit line driving circuit 76 further includes: a P channel MOS transistor 10PQ2, which combines the bit line BL to the power supply node according to the output signal of the NAND circuit NK1; and an N channel MOS transistor NQ2 according to the NOR circuit NRK1. The output signal combines the bit line BL to the ground node. When the data is written, the output signal of the OR gate OG1 is the L level, so the output signal of the inverter IV3 is the Η level. When the write bit current is selected by the bit line BL, the output signal of the NAND gate NG2 is at the L level. In this state, the output signal of the NAND circuit NK1 becomes the power supply voltage level. < Η level, the output signal of the NOR circuit NRK1 will become the reference voltage Vref 32 319644 200830313 • Level Η level. Therefore, the MOS transistor PQ2 becomes non-conductive, and the MOS transistor NQ2 becomes conductive. Therefore, the bit line BL • is discharged via the MOS transistor NQ2 (one end of the bit line BL is combined to the power supply node). The amount of current flowing from the power supply node to the ground node via the bit line BL is set by the voltage supplied to the gate of the MOS transistor NQ2, that is, by the voltage level of the reference voltage Vref. Moreover, when the data is written, the bit line BL of the non-selected column becomes the Η level due to the output signal of the inverter IV3, and the output signal _ of the NAND gate G2 also becomes the Η level, so the MOS transistor PQ2 It will be turned on, and both ends of the bit line BL are coupled to the power supply node. In the configuration shown in Fig. 11, the sense amplifier 58 includes a sense amplifier (Sense Amplifier) circuit 78 provided for each of the bit lines BL. The sense amplifier circuit 78 includes a comparison circuit CMP for comparing the voltage of the bit line BL with the read reference voltage VRFER, and an AND gate G5 for receiving an output signal of the OR circuit OG1 0 included in the decode control circuit 73 and The output signal of the AND gate G4 included in the Y address decoding circuit 74 generates an output signal of the NAND gate G2 of the decoding circuit 74 when the sensing activation signal EN for activating the comparison circuit CMP is generated. It is a standard. Therefore, in the bit line driving circuit 76, the output signal of the NOR circuit NRK1 becomes the L level, and the MOS transistor NQ2 becomes non-conductive. In addition, when the data is read, the output of the OR gate OG1 will become the Η level, and the output signal of the inverter IV3 will become the L level. Therefore, the output signal of the NAND circuit ΝΚ1 becomes a Η level, and 33 319644 200830313 M 〇 S electric 曰 _ JQ2 will become non-conductive. - Pay, one end of the bit line rainbow is coupled to the power supply node, and the bit το line drive circuit 76 is provided on the iron &, (3) Ai Cheng output high impedance state. The current flowing through the bit line BL is controlled by the variable lightning resistance of the Ida 5 body early to MC and the access of the unillustrated Thunder Touch 2 ^ package to pick up the B body The amount of current discharged is determined. In the salt ampere amplifier circuit 78, 趑 A A — Ά Τ compares the voltage of the bit line BL with the read base car + voltage VREFR - lL 士士,

仃比軼,猎此能讀出該選擇記憶體單元M 的記憶資料。 >並且,當比較電路CMP為非活性狀態時,感測放大 益電路78係成為輪出高阻抗狀態,不會影響到選擇列的位 元線的資料讀出。 比較器66係包含有EX〇R(互斥或)閘eg,係接收 2以問鎖感測放大器電路78的輸出信號之輸出資料閃鎖 益67的輸出信號、以及被輸入資料閂鎖器65閃鎖的輸入 貧料。該EXOR閘EG係不一致檢測閘極,當輸出資料問 .鎖器67及輸入資料問鎖器65的閃鎖資料的邏輯值不同 時’將其輪出信號ρ/F設定成Η位準。 輸出資料閂鎖器67係於用以讀出資料至外部的讀出 模式時,將從感測放大器電路78所讀出的資料作為外=讀 出資料D〇予以輸出。該輸出資料閂鎖器67的内部讀出及 外部讀出的路徑切換雖未明確地顯示,但係藉由時^產生 器64來執行。 比較器66的輸出信號P/F係供給至時序產生哭料。 時序產生器64係根據來自指令解碼器62的,動作模式#示 319644 34 200830313 ‘信號與驗證結果指示信號Ρ/F來設定寫入順序。 此外,由於指令解碼器62及位址閂鎖器69係對應第 • 10圖所示的構成,故不重複其詳細說明。 * 第12圖係顯示第11圖所示的雙態觸變MRAM的資料 寫入時的動作之時序圖。以下,參照第12圖,說明第11 圖所示的雙態觸變MRAM的資料寫入動作。 於資料寫入時,寫入資料供給至輸入資料閂鎖器65, 且寫入指示(寫入指令)供给至指令解碼器62。位址閂鎖 _器69係接收寫入位址。根據該寫入指示,指令解碼器62 係將寫入指示信號Write設定成活性狀態。讀出指示信號 Read為非活性狀態(L位準)。 記憶體裝置為雙態觸變MRAM,爲了防止資料反轉而 防止錯誤資料的寫入,係根據寫入位址,於第一次寫入前 執行寫入對象的記憶體單元的記憶資料的讀出。於該預讀 時,時序產生器64係將驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN予以 ⑩活性化。因此,於解碼控制電路73中,OR閘OG1的輸出 信號會變成Η位準。在該狀態中,位元線驅動電路72為 輸出南阻抗狀怨。猎由未圖不的字線驅動電路,根據來自 位址閂鎖器69所提供的X位址信號XADD,將字線驅動 至選擇狀態。接著,根據Υ位址信號YADD,Υ解碼電路 74的AND閘04的輸出信號會變成11位準。因此,感測 活性化信號EN會被活性化,感測放大器電路78會將與流 通於位元線BL的電流對應之電壓與讀出基準電壓VREFR 進行比·較,並根據比較結果來產生,内部讀出資料。 35 319644 200830313 .#從該感測放大器電路78所讀出的寫入對象的記憶 •體早兀的記憶資料與來自外部的寫人資料的邏輯值不一致 :時’比較器66的輸出信號jvu H位準。因此,於解碼 電路70及74中,NAND閘⑴及⑺會被致能(⑽⑷。 此外,B夺序產生器、64會根據該H位準的驗證結果指示戶 號IVF,將寫人數位線驅動信號w—DL及寫人位元線驅動 信號W—BL·依序活性化。 在寫入數位線驅動信號W—DL·的Η位準期間,藉由χ 解碼電路70及數位線驅動電路72,電流會於對應的θ數位 線DL從電源節點流通至接地節點。此外,對於位元線, 係藉由Υ解碼電路74及位元線驅動電路76,根據寫入位 元線驅動信號W一BL進行放電。 當該寫入結束時,時序產生器64會再次將驗證讀出活 眭化彳§旒VFREN予以活性化。在此情形下,當產生對記 體單元MC的寫入不良,且寫入資料與記憶體單元的記 _ k貝料的邏輯值不一致時,驗證結果指示信號p/F亦為Η 位準。因此’時序產生器64會再次將驅動信號w—dl及 依序活性化。 於此第二次的寫入結束後,再次進行用以判斷資料是 否已正確地寫入之寫入驗證動作。當已正常進行寫入至記 十思體單元時,來自輸出資料閂鎖器67的讀出資料及來自輸 寅料門鎖器6 5的輸入資料的邏輯值會一致,比較器$ 6 所輪出的驗證結果指示信號P/F會變成L位準。在此情 形下,時序產生器64係結束寫入。接著,將寫入指示信號 36 319644 200830313 ‘ Write驅動至非活性狀態。 另一方面,於該寫入驗證動作中,當判斷寫入不良時, •再次執行寫入。重複執行該寫入及寫入驗證,直至資料正 •常的寫入或滿足預定的寫入試行條件。關於寫入試行條 件,於後述詳細說明之。 並且,在比較器66中,亦可使用驗證結果指示信號P /F在初始狀態(待機狀態)中會維持在Η位準的構成。 輸出資料閂鎖器67及輸入資料閂鎖器65的重置(reset) _值只要設定成與初始邏輯值不同的值即可。 並且,在第12圖中係顯示一位元資料的寫入順序。例 如如同叢發(burst)寫入般,當根攄一個寫入指示將資料 依序寫入至複數個位址時,位址閂鎖器69亦可讀入最初接 收的位址ADD (參照第10圖),並從前頭位址依序更新 寫入位址,以進行資料的寫入。此情形下,對各位址執行 預讀及寫入驗證。 φ 第13圖係顯示與一個字線WL相關連的部分的構成之 一例。X解碼器50係包含有針對字線WL各者而設置的X 位址解碼電路80。X位址解碼電路80係包含有:AND閘 G6,係接收X位址信號XADD ;以及NAND閘NG3,係 接收第11圖所示的字線控制電路所包含的OR閘OG1的 輸出信號、以及AND閘G6的輸出信號。該AND閘G6 係AND型解碼電路,當藉由X位址信號XADD指定有對 應的字線時,會輸出Η位準的信號。因此,NAND閘NG3 於資料讀出時及選擇時〜,輸出L位準的信號。當對應的字 37 319644 200830313 •線WL為非選擇狀態時,該X解碼電路80的輸出信號會 變成H位準。 • 於DL驅動器/WL驅動器52中,係設置對應字線 • WL各者的字線驅動電路82。該字線驅動電路82係包含有 P通道MOS電晶體PQ3及N通道MOS電晶體NQ3,係於 各閘極接收NAND閘NG3的輸出信號。該字線WL係連 接對應的行的記憶體單元MC的存取電晶體TRS的閘極。 第13圖中係代表性地顯示一個位元的記憶體單元。 麵I 於字線驅動電路8 2中,當X位址解碼電路8 0的輸出 信號為L位準時,P通道MOS電晶體PQ3會導通,而將 字線WL驅動至電源電壓位準。因此,於記憶體單元MC 中,存取電晶體TRS會導通,並形成電流從位線BL經由 可變電阻元件VR流至源極線(接地節點)的路徑。 於非選擇狀態中,X位址解碼電路80的輸出信號為Η 位準,字線WL會藉由MOS電晶體NQ3而維持在接地電 A壓位準。在此狀態下,於記憶體單元MC中,存取電晶體 TRS為非導通狀態,電流經由可變磁性電阻元件(MT J元 件)而流通的路徑會被切斷。 如第13圖所示,利用字線驅動電路及X位址解碼電 路,藉此於資料讀出時,能經由記憶體單元MC而流通對 應可變電阻值VR的電阻值的電流。 〔變形例一〕 第14圖係概略地顯示本發明的第一實施形態的變形 例 < 的雙態觸變MRAM的寫入/讀出部的構成圖。於第 38 319644 200830313仃 轶 , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , > Also, when the comparison circuit CMP is in an inactive state, the sense amplifier circuit 78 is in a high-impedance state, and does not affect the data readout of the bit line of the selected column. The comparator 66 includes an EX〇R (mutually exclusive OR) gate eg, which receives an output signal of the output data flash lock 67 of the output signal of the lock sense amplifier circuit 78, and the input data latch 65. The input of the flash lock is poor. The EXOR gate EG is inconsistently detecting the gate, and when the output data asks that the locker 67 and the input data locker 65 have different logic values of the flash lock data, the wheel signal ρ/F is set to the clamp level. The output data latch 67 is used to output the data read from the sense amplifier circuit 78 as the external = read data D when the read mode for reading the data to the outside is output. Although the internal readout and the external read path switching of the output data latch 67 are not explicitly shown, they are executed by the timer 64. The output signal P/F of the comparator 66 is supplied to the timing to generate a cries. The timing generator 64 sets the write order based on the operation mode # 314644 34 200830313 'signal and verification result indication signal Ρ/F from the instruction decoder 62. Further, since the command decoder 62 and the address latch 69 correspond to the configuration shown in Fig. 10, detailed description thereof will not be repeated. * Fig. 12 is a timing chart showing the operation of the data of the two-state thixotropic MRAM shown in Fig. 11. Hereinafter, the data writing operation of the two-state thixotropic MRAM shown in Fig. 11 will be described with reference to Fig. 12. At the time of data writing, the write data is supplied to the input data latch 65, and the write instruction (write command) is supplied to the command decoder 62. The address latch _ 69 receives the write address. Based on the write instruction, the command decoder 62 sets the write instruction signal Write to the active state. The read instruction signal Read is in an inactive state (L level). The memory device is a two-state thixotropic MRAM. In order to prevent data inversion and prevent the writing of erroneous data, the memory data of the memory unit to be written is read before the first writing according to the write address. Out. At the time of the pre-reading, the timing generator 64 activates the verification read activation signal VFREN. Therefore, in the decoding control circuit 73, the output signal of the OR gate OG1 becomes a Η level. In this state, the bit line driving circuit 72 outputs a south impedance. The word line driving circuit is not driven, and the word line is driven to the selected state based on the X address signal XADD supplied from the address latch 69. Next, according to the Υ address signal YADD, the output signal of the AND gate 04 of the Υ decoding circuit 74 becomes 11 levels. Therefore, the sense activation signal EN is activated, and the sense amplifier circuit 78 compares the voltage corresponding to the current flowing through the bit line BL with the read reference voltage VREFR and generates it based on the comparison result. Read data internally. 35 319644 200830313 .# The memory data of the memory of the write object read from the sense amplifier circuit 78 is inconsistent with the logical value of the write data from the outside: when the output signal of the comparator 66 is jvu H Level. Therefore, in the decoding circuits 70 and 74, the NAND gates (1) and (7) are enabled ((10)(4). In addition, the B-order generator, 64 will indicate the account number IVF according to the verification result of the H-level, and the number of digits will be written. The driving signal w_DL and the writing bit line driving signal W_BL are sequentially activated. During the writing of the digit line driving signal W_DL·, by the decoding circuit 70 and the digit line driving circuit 72. The current flows from the power supply node to the ground node on the corresponding θ digit line DL. Further, for the bit line, the signal is driven by the Υ decoding circuit 74 and the bit line driving circuit 76 according to the write bit line. A BL is discharged. When the writing is completed, the timing generator 64 again activates the verification readout 彳 旒 旒 VFREN. In this case, when a write failure to the body unit MC is generated, When the written data does not match the logical value of the memory cell, the verification result indication signal p/F is also the Η level. Therefore, the timing generator 64 will again drive the signal w_dl and the sequence. Activation. After the second writing is completed, it is used again. Whether the broken data has been correctly written into the verifying action. When the writing is normally performed to the recording unit, the read data from the output data latch 67 and the data from the output door latch 65 The logical value of the input data will be the same, and the verification result indicating signal P/F of the comparator $6 will become the L level. In this case, the timing generator 64 ends the writing. Then, the indication signal is written. 36 319644 200830313 'Write is driven to inactive state. On the other hand, in the write verification operation, when it is judged that the write is defective, • Write is performed again. Repeat the write and write verification until the data is positive. The normal write or the predetermined write test condition is satisfied. The write test condition will be described later in detail. Further, in the comparator 66, the verification result instruction signal P /F may be used in the initial state (standby state). The configuration of the output data latch 67 and the input data latch 65 can be set to a value different from the initial logical value. Medium display The order in which the bit data is written. For example, like a burst write, when a write instruction instructs data to be sequentially written to a plurality of addresses, the address latch 69 can also be read into the original address. The received address ADD (refer to Fig. 10), and the write address is sequentially updated from the previous address to perform data writing. In this case, pre-read and write verification are performed on each address. The figure shows an example of the configuration of a portion associated with one word line WL. The X decoder 50 includes an X address decoding circuit 80 provided for each of the word lines WL. The X address decoding circuit 80 includes: The AND gate G6 receives the X address signal XADD and the NAND gate NG3 receives the output signal of the OR gate OG1 included in the word line control circuit shown in FIG. 11 and the output signal of the AND gate G6. The AND gate G6 is an AND type decoding circuit that outputs a level signal when a corresponding word line is designated by the X address signal XADD. Therefore, the NAND gate NG3 outputs a signal of the L level at the time of data reading and selection. When the corresponding word 37 319644 200830313 • the line WL is in the non-selected state, the output signal of the X decoding circuit 80 becomes the H level. • In the DL driver/WL driver 52, the word line driver circuit 82 of each of the corresponding word lines • WL is provided. The word line driving circuit 82 includes a P channel MOS transistor PQ3 and an N channel MOS transistor NQ3, and the gate receives the output signal of the NAND gate NG3. The word line WL is connected to the gate of the access transistor TRS of the memory cell MC of the corresponding row. In Fig. 13, a memory cell of one bit is representatively displayed. In the word line driving circuit 82, when the output signal of the X address decoding circuit 80 is L level, the P channel MOS transistor PQ3 is turned on, and the word line WL is driven to the power supply voltage level. Therefore, in the memory cell MC, the access transistor TRS is turned on, and a path is formed in which a current flows from the bit line BL through the variable resistance element VR to the source line (ground node). In the non-selected state, the output signal of the X address decoding circuit 80 is at the Η level, and the word line WL is maintained at the ground A voltage level by the MOS transistor NQ3. In this state, in the memory cell MC, the access transistor TRS is in a non-conduction state, and a path through which a current flows through the variable magnetic resistance element (MT J element) is cut. As shown in Fig. 13, the word line drive circuit and the X address decoding circuit are used to allow a current corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistance value VR to flow through the memory cell MC during data reading. [First Modification] Fig. 14 is a view schematically showing the configuration of a writing/reading unit of a two-state thixotropic MRAM according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. At 38 319644 200830313

’ 14圖中,針對位元線BL0至BLn各者設置讀出閘極RGO 至RGn,並設置寫入列選擇閘極WG0至WGn。讀出列選 •擇閘極RG0至11〇11係分別於讀出列選擇信號5^81^至 ’ RCSLn活性化時成為導通狀態。寫入列選擇閘極WG0至 WGn係分別於寫入列選擇信號WCSL0至WCSLn活性化 時成為導通狀態。 讀出列選擇閘極RG0至RGn係共通地結合至内部讀 出資料線ROL。寫入列選擇閘極WGO至WGn係共通地結 •合至内部寫入資料線WIL。該讀出列選擇信號RCSL0至 RCSLn係於資料讀出時,根據Y位址信號YADD而產生。 寫入列選擇信號WCSL0係於資料寫入時,根據Y位址信 號YADD而產生。 針對内部讀出資料線ROL設置讀出放大器90,針對 内部寫入資料線WIL設置寫入驅動器92。 讀出放大器90係具備有與第11圖所示.的感測放大器 ⑩電路78相同的構成。寫入驅動器92亦具備有與第11圖所 示的位元線驅動電路相同的構成。這些讀出放大器9 0及寫 入驅動器92的動作係根據第11圖所示的解碼控制電路73 的輸出信號來執行(只要將接收Y位址信號YADD的閘極 G4的輸出信號設定成常時選擇狀態即可)。 在第14圖所示的構成中,無須針對位元線BL0至BLn 各者設置感測放大器電路及位元線驅動電路,故減少佈局 面積。 、資料的寫入及讀出動作係與第11圖所示的雙態觸變 39 319644 200830313 • MRAM相同。對應選擇列的讀出列選擇閘極RCSLi及寫入 列選擇閘極WCSLi係於讀出時及寫入時根據Y位址信號 而驅動至選擇狀態。 ' 並且,在第14圖所示的構成中,讀出放大器90亦可 共通設置於位元線BL0至3111,寫入驅動器92亦可針對 位元線BL0至BLn各者一對一地設置。能避免内部寫入資 料線WIL的配線電阻影響位元線寫入電流,雨能正確地產 生位元線寫入電流。 瞻 此外,與字線驅動電路相同,針對數位線分別設置數 位線驅動電路。 〔變形例二〕 第15圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態一的變形例 二的自旋注入型MRAM的整體構成圖。於第15圖所示的 自旋注入型MRAM中,在記憶體單元陣列22中,記憶體 單元MC係排列戍行列狀,且分別對應記憶體單元行設置 ⑩有字線WL及數位線DL。並且,對應記憶體單元MC各列 設置有位元線BL及源極線SL。 於自旋注入型MRAM中,由於根據自旋注入來設定記 體早元的磁化方向’故無須特別設置數位線DL。然而, 藉由該數位線DL的電流將磁場施加至可變磁性電阻元件 (MJT元件)VR的難磁化轴方向,藉此補助磁場反轉。 於自旋注入型MRAM中,可變磁性電阻元件VR的易磁化 軸及難磁化軸係分別與位元線及字線平行配置。 於此MRAM中,爲-了在位元線BL與源極線SL之間 40 319644 200830313 流通電流’故在寫入系電路2〇中設置源極線解碼器100 以及源極線驅動器102。源極線驅動器102與位元線驅動 56係根據輸入資料的邏輯值來決定流通於位元線bl與 源極線SL之間的電流的方向。 ’、 在寫入控制電路24中,係與雙態觸變MRAM同樣設 置指令解碼器Π2、時序產生器114、以及比較器116 ^ 在自旋注入型MRAM中,無需寫入前的預讀。指令解 碼态U2係為了於第一次的寫入時將比較器116的判斷結 果視為無效來進行寫入,故進一步產生比較無效化信號 \StyWnte。根據此比較無效化信號1 st一Write,在第一次的 貧^寫期間中比較器116的比較結果會被無效化,-無關 於舄入資料及寫入對象的記憶體單元的記億資料的邏輯 值,會進行寫入。然而,在自旋注入型MRAM中,當進行 預讀時’亦無須產生此比較無效化信號lst—Wdte,^進: 與雙態觸變MRAM同樣的寫人順序。可在雙態觸變她細 及自輕人型隱施中義相同構成的寫人控制電路。In the Fig. 14, the read gates RGO to RGn are set for each of the bit lines BL0 to BLn, and the write column selection gates WG0 to WGn are set. Read column selection • Select gates RG0 to 11〇11 are turned on when the read column selection signals 5^81^ to RCSLn are activated. The write column selection gates WG0 to WGn are turned on when the write column selection signals WCSL0 to WCSLn are activated. The read column select gates RG0 to RGn are commonly coupled to the internal read data line ROL. The write column select gates WGO to WGn are commonly connected to the internal write data line WIL. The read column selection signals RCSL0 to RCSLn are generated based on the Y address signal YADD when data is read. The write column selection signal WCSL0 is generated based on the Y address signal YADD when data is written. The sense amplifier 90 is provided for the internal read data line ROL, and the write driver 92 is provided for the internal write data line WIL. The sense amplifier 90 is provided with the same configuration as the sense amplifier 10 circuit 78 shown in Fig. 11. The write driver 92 is also provided with the same configuration as the bit line drive circuit shown in Fig. 11. The operation of these sense amplifiers 90 and write drivers 92 is performed in accordance with the output signal of the decode control circuit 73 shown in Fig. 11 (as long as the output signal of the gate G4 receiving the Y address signal YADD is set to a constant time selection The status can be). In the configuration shown in Fig. 14, it is not necessary to provide the sense amplifier circuit and the bit line drive circuit for each of the bit lines BL0 to BLn, so that the layout area is reduced. The data writing and reading operations are the same as the two-state thixotropic changes shown in Fig. 11 319644 200830313 • MRAM. The read column selection gate RCSLi and the write column selection gate WCSLi corresponding to the selected column are driven to the selected state in accordance with the Y address signal at the time of reading and writing. Further, in the configuration shown in Fig. 14, the sense amplifiers 90 may be commonly provided in the bit lines BL0 to 3111, and the write driver 92 may be provided one-to-one for each of the bit lines BL0 to BLn. It can avoid the wiring resistance of the internal write data line WIL affecting the bit line write current, and the rain can correctly generate the bit line write current. In addition, as with the word line driver circuit, the digit line driver circuit is separately provided for the digit line. [Variation 2] FIG. 15 is a view schematically showing an overall configuration of a spin injection type MRAM according to a second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. In the spin injection type MRAM shown in Fig. 15, in the memory cell array 22, the memory cells MC are arranged in a matrix, and each of the memory cell rows is provided with a word line WL and a digit line DL. Further, bit lines BL and source lines SL are provided for each column of the corresponding memory cell MC. In the spin injection type MRAM, since the magnetization direction of the text early element is set in accordance with the spin injection, it is not necessary to particularly set the digit line DL. However, the magnetic field is applied to the hard magnetization axis direction of the variable magnetic resistance element (MJT element) VR by the current of the digit line DL, thereby assisting the magnetic field inversion. In the spin injection type MRAM, the easy magnetization axis and the hard magnetization axis of the variable magnetic resistance element VR are arranged in parallel with the bit line and the word line, respectively. In this MRAM, the source current decoder 100 and the source line driver 102 are provided in the write system circuit 2A between the bit line BL and the source line SL by 40 319644 200830313. The source line driver 102 and the bit line driver 56 determine the direction of the current flowing between the bit line bl and the source line SL based on the logic value of the input data. In the write control circuit 24, the instruction decoder Π2, the timing generator 114, and the comparator 116 are provided similarly to the toggle flop MRAM. In the spin injection type MRAM, pre-reading before writing is not required. The command decode state U2 is written in order to invalidate the judgment result of the comparator 116 at the time of the first write, so that the comparison invalidation signal \StyWnte is further generated. According to the comparison invalidation signal 1st_Write, the comparison result of the comparator 116 is invalidated during the first write-down period, and there is no information about the data input and the memory unit of the object to be written. The logical value will be written. However, in the spin injection type MRAM, it is not necessary to generate the comparison invalidation signal lst_Wdte when performing the pre-reading, and the same writing order as the two-state thixotropic MRAM. The write control circuit can be constructed in the same way as the two-state tactile change and the self-lighting type.

才序產生盎114係僅根據寫入位元線驅動信號w BL 來產生寫入時脈信號W ΡΤτγ 1 一 1口跣W—PULSE。错由此寫入脈波俨梦 W—PULSE來設定寫入時間。 儿 第15圖所示的MRAM 雙態觸變MRAM構成相同 號碼並省略其詳細說明。 之另一構成係與第1〇圖所示之 在對應的部分附上相同的參照 第16圖係更具體地顯示盥 u ”乐i 圖所不的自旋注入 MRAM的一條位元線BL、_ 4欠| 知數位線DL、以及一條源 319644 41 200830313 •線SL關連部分的構成圖。於自旋注入型MRAM中,根據 寫入資料的邏輯值,流通於位元線BL及源極線SL之間的 •電流方向會不同。於第一次的資料寫入時,為了停止预讀, •故在比較器Π6中復設置有用以接收EXOR閘EG的輸出 信號與比較無效化信號lst_Write之OR閘OG2。從OR閘 OG2輸出驗證結果指示信號P/F。 於解碼控制電路73中,為了對應寫入資料的邏輯值來 改變位元線電流的方向,故復設置有用以接收來自輸入資 _料閂鎖器65的輸入資料與來自比較器116的驗證結果指示 信號P/F之AND閘G7。此AND閘G7的輸出信號係施 加至AND閘G3。AND閘03係接收取代寫入位元線驅動 信號W—之寫入脈波信號W_PULSE。設置於位元線驅 動器56之位元線驅動電路76以及設置於Y解碼器54之Y 位址解碼電路74之構成,係與第10圖所示的雙態觸變 MRAM的構成相同,於對應的部分附上相同的參照號碼並 •省略其詳細說明。 此外,包含於用以驅動數位線DL之數位線驅動器的 數位線驅動電路72以及包含於X解碼器50之數位線解碼 電路70之構成亦與第10圖所示之構成相同,於對應的部 分附上相同的參照號碼並省略其詳細說明。 源極線解碼器100係包含有:源極線解碼電路122, 係對應源極線SL各者而設置;以及源極線解碼控制電路 120,係共通地設置於源極線SL。源極線解碼控制電路120 係包含有:反相器IV4,係反轉輸入資料閂鎖器65〜的閂鎖 42 319644 200830313 ‘資料;以及AND閘G8,係接收寫入驗證結果指示信號P /F與反相器IV4的輸出信號。當寫入資料為L位準且寫 •入驗證結果指示信號P/F為Η位準而表示為寫入不良 ’時,AND閘G8會產生Η位準的信號。 源極線解碼控制電路120復包含有:AND閘G9,係 接收寫入脈波信號WJPULSE、AND閘G8的輸出信號、 以及寫入指示信號Write ; OR閘OG3,係接收讀出指示信 號Read與驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN;以及OR閘OG4, ⑩係接收OR閘OG3與AND閘G9的輸出。在進行資料寫入 時,於寫入脈波信號W—PLUSE的活性化期間,AND閘 G9會輸出Η位準的信號。OR閘OG3係具有與位元線解 碼控制電路73所包含的OR閘OG1相同的功能,在進行 資料讀出時會輪出Η位準的信號。藉由利用此OR閘 OG3,於資料讀出時將源極線SL結合至接地節點,形成 電流從位元線BL流通至源極線SL之路徑。 ⑩ 源極線解碼電路122係包含有:AND閘G10,係揍收 Y位址信號YADD ;以及NAND閘NG4,係接收OR閘 OG4的,輸出信號與AND閘G10的輸出信號。AND閘G10 係具有作為AND型解碼電路的功能,係在Y位址信號 YADD指定對應的列時,輸出11位準的信號。 源極線驅動器102係包含有源極線驅動電路124,係 對應源極線SL各者而設置。The ancestor generation system 114 generates the write clock signal W ΡΤτγ 1 -1 port 跣W_PULSE only based on the write bit line drive signal w BL . The error is written by the pulse nightmare W-PULSE to set the write time. The MRAM two-state thixotropic MRAM shown in Fig. 15 constitutes the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The other configuration is the same as that shown in the first drawing. The same reference numeral 16 is used to more specifically display a bit line BL of the spin injection MRAM of the 盥u ” _ 4 Under | Known bit line DL, and a source 319644 41 200830313 • Structure of the connected part of line SL. In the spin injection type MRAM, according to the logic value of the written data, it flows through the bit line BL and the source line. The direction of the current between the SLs will be different. When the first data is written, in order to stop the pre-reading, the comparator Π6 is reset to receive the output signal of the EXOR gate EG and the comparison invalidation signal lst_Write. OR gate OG2. The verification result indication signal P/F is output from the OR gate OG2. In the decoding control circuit 73, in order to change the direction of the bit line current corresponding to the logical value of the written data, the reset setting is useful to receive the input from the input. The input data of the material latch 65 and the AND gate G7 of the verification result indication signal P/F from the comparator 116. The output signal of the AND gate G7 is applied to the AND gate G3. The AND gate 03 receives the replacement write bit. Yuan line drive signal W—write pulse signal W_PU The configuration of the bit line driving circuit 76 provided in the bit line driver 56 and the Y address decoding circuit 74 provided in the Y decoder 54 is the same as that of the two-state thixotropic MRAM shown in FIG. The same reference numerals are attached to the corresponding parts and the detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, the digit line driver circuit 72 included in the digit line driver for driving the digit line DL and the digit line decoding circuit 70 included in the X decoder 50 are provided. The configuration is the same as the configuration shown in Fig. 10. The same reference numerals will be given to the corresponding parts, and the detailed description will be omitted. The source line decoder 100 includes a source line decoding circuit 122 corresponding to the source. Each of the lines SL is provided; and the source line decoding control circuit 120 is commonly disposed on the source line SL. The source line decoding control circuit 120 includes an inverter IV4, which is an inverted input data latch. 65~ latch 42 319644 200830313 'data; and AND gate G8, receive output signal of write verification result indication signal P /F and inverter IV4. When writing data is L level and write and verify result The indication signal P/F is Η When it is indicated as a write failure, the AND gate G8 generates a signal of the level. The source line decoding control circuit 120 includes: an AND gate G9, which receives the output of the write pulse signal WJPULSE and the AND gate G8. The signal and the write indication signal Write; the OR gate OG3 receives the read instruction signal Read and the verification read activation signal VFREN; and the OR gate OG4, 10 receives the output of the OR gate OG3 and the AND gate G9. At the time of writing, during the activation of the write pulse signal W_PLUSE, the AND gate G9 outputs a signal of the level. The OR gate OG3 has the same function as the OR gate OG1 included in the bit line decoding control circuit 73, and the signal of the level is rotated when the data is read. By using the OR gate OG3, the source line SL is coupled to the ground node at the time of data reading, and a path through which the current flows from the bit line BL to the source line SL is formed. The source line decoding circuit 122 includes: an AND gate G10, which receives the Y address signal YADD; and a NAND gate NG4 that receives the output signal of the OR gate OG4 and the output signal of the AND gate G10. The AND gate G10 has a function as an AND type decoding circuit, and outputs a 11-level signal when the Y address signal YADD specifies a corresponding column. The source line driver 102 includes a source line driver circuit 124, which is provided corresponding to each of the source lines SL.

此源極線驅動電路124係包含有:反相器電路IVK3、 IVK4,係分別接收NAND閘NG今的輸出信號;P通道MOS 43 319644 200830313 ,電晶體PQ4,係於反相器電路IVK3的輸出信號為L位準 時將對應的源極線SL結合至電源節點;以及N通道MOS •電晶體NQ4,係於反相器電路IVK4的輸出信號為Η位準 ,時將對應的源極線SL結合至接地節點。 _ 反湘器電路IVK3係將電源電壓作為高側電溏電壓來 接收。反相器電路IVK4係將基準電壓Vref作為高側電源 電壓來接收。因此,當N通道MOS電晶體NQ4導通時, 經由源極線SL而流通至接地節點的電流量會藉由基準電 ⑩壓Vref來控制。 於源極線解碼器100及源極線驅動器102中,在資料 寫入時進行以下的動作。首先,當驗證結果指示信號P/F 為L位準而表示正常寫入時,AND閘G8的輸出信號會變 成L位準,如此,AND閘G9的輸出信號亦會變成L位準。 於資料寫入時,讀出指示信號Read及驗證讀出活性化信 號VFREN亦皆為L位準。於此狀態中,OR閘OG4的輸 赢出信號會變成L位準,NAND閘NG4的輸出信號會變成ΗThe source line driving circuit 124 includes: inverter circuits IVK3 and IVK4, which respectively receive output signals of the NAND gate NG; P channel MOS 43 319644 200830313, transistor PQ4, which is outputted by the inverter circuit IVK3. When the signal is L-level, the corresponding source line SL is coupled to the power supply node; and the N-channel MOS • transistor NQ4 is connected to the output signal of the inverter circuit IVK4, and the corresponding source line SL is combined. To the ground node. _ The reverse tank circuit IVK3 receives the power supply voltage as a high-side power supply voltage. The inverter circuit IVK4 receives the reference voltage Vref as a high side power supply voltage. Therefore, when the N-channel MOS transistor NQ4 is turned on, the amount of current flowing to the ground node via the source line SL is controlled by the reference voltage Vref. In the source line decoder 100 and the source line driver 102, the following operations are performed at the time of data writing. First, when the verification result indicating signal P/F is L level and indicates normal writing, the output signal of the AND gate G8 becomes L level, and thus the output signal of the AND gate G9 also becomes the L level. When the data is written, the read instruction signal Read and the verification read activation signal VFREN are also at the L level. In this state, the output signal of the OR gate OG4 will become the L level, and the output signal of the NAND gate NG4 will become Η.

W 位準。如此,於源極線驅動電路124中,MOS電晶體PQ4 會變成導通狀態,MOS電晶體NQ4會變成非導通狀態。 如此,源極線SL會結合至電源節點。 此時,於位元線解碼器中,AND閘G7的輸出信號亦 為L位準,因此,NAND閘NG2的輸出信號會變成Η位 準。OR閘OG1的輸出信號為L位準。因此,NAND電路 NK1的輸出信號會變為L位準,NOR電路NRK1的輸出信 號會變成L位準·。如此,位元線BL會維持於電源電壓位 44 319644 200830313 ,準。 於待機狀態或非選擇狀態時,Y位址信號YADD不會 -指定對應的位元線BL及源極線81^。因此,於位元線解碼 ,電路74中,NAND閘NG2的輸出信號會變成11位準,減08 電晶體NQ2·會變成非導通狀態。並且,OR閘OG1的輸出 信號為L位準,因此,反相器電路IV3的輸出信號為Η位 準。因此,NAND電路ΝΚ1的輸出信號會變成L位準, MOS電晶體PQ2會導通,位元線BL係維持於電源電壓位 ⑩準。源極線亦相同,NAND閘NG4的輸出信號會變成Ή 位準,MOS電晶體PQ4會變成導通狀態,MOS電晶體NQ4 會變成非導填狀態。如此,源極線SL亦維持於電源電壓 位準。 字線選擇的解碼電路及字線驅動電路的構成除了字線 解碼電路80於寫入時及讀出時會進行X位址解碼動作之 外,係與第13圖所示的構成相同。亦即,於第13圖所示 ▲的構成中係未使用OR閘OG1。 於資料寫入時,驗證結果指示信號P/F為Η位準。 此時,位元線BL及源極線SL的電位會根據來自輸入資料 閂鎖器65的寫入資料的邏輯值而不同。 (1 ) H資料的寫入: 此情形中,首先針對位元線,AND閘G7的輸出信號 會變成Η位準。寫入時,根據寫入脈波信號WJPULSE, AND閘G3的輸出信號會變成Η位準,如此,NAND閘 NG2的輸出信號會變成乙位準^。在此?假設為選擇對應的 45 319644 200830313 •位元線之情形。此情形下,NAND電路NK1的輸出信號會 變成Η位準,MOS電晶體PQ2會變成非導通狀態。QR閘 • OG1的輸出信號於資料寫入時為L位準,NOR電路NRK1 ’的輸出信號會變成Η位準。如此,MOS電晶體NQ2會導 通,位元線BL會經由MOS電晶體NQ2而結合至接地節 點。 另一方面,針對源極線SL,反相器IV4的輸出信號會 變成L位準,AND閘G8的輸出信號會變成L位準。如此, ⑩此狀態係與非選擇狀態或待機狀態相同,源極線SL係藉 由源極線驅動電路124而結合至電源節點。 針對數位線,數位線驅動電路72的輸出信號會變成L 位準,於數位線DL,電流會從電源節點流通至接地節點。 並且,藉由未圖示的字線驅動電路,對應的字線會驅 動至選擇狀態,存取電晶體TRS會導通。如此,在此情形 下,電流會從源極線SL流通至位元線BL。針對此記憶體 ⑩單元MC之寫入電流,係藉由包含於位元線驅動電路76 的MOS電晶體NQ2的閘極電壓(亦即基準電壓Vref)來 控制。 (2) L資料的寫入: 此情形下,針對位元線,AND閘G7的輸出信號會變 成L位準,如此,NAND閘NG1的輸出信號會變成Η位 準。如此,與待機狀態相同,於位元線驅動電路76中, MOS電晶體PQ2會導通,位元線BL會結合至電源節點。 乂 · … 在此L資料寫_入的情形下,字\線WL亦驅動至Η位準, 46 319644 200830313 •數位線DL係驅動至選擇狀態且流通數位線電流。 另一方面,針對源極線,反相器IV4的輸出信號會變 •成Η位準,如此,AND閘G8的輸出信號會變成Η位準。 •當寫入脈波指示信號WJ>ULSE變成Η位準時,NAND閘 NG4會變成Η位準。如此,於源極線驅動電路124中, MOS電晶體NQ4會變成導通狀態,MOS電晶體PQ4會變 成非導通狀態。如此,於此狀態下,電流會從位元線BL 流通至源極線SL。此時,經由記憶體單元MC而流通的電 ⑩流量係藉由源極線驅動電路124的反相器IVK4的高侧電 源電壓(亦即基準電壓Vref)來控制。 於資料讀出時,針對位元線,OR閘OG1的輸出信號 會變成Η位準,如此,NOR電路NRK1的輸出信號會變成 L位準。反相器IV3的輸出信號會變成L位準,如此,NAND 電路NK1的輸出信號會變成Η位準。如此,MOS電晶體 PQ2會變成非導通狀態。亦即,於資料讀出時,位元線驅 0動電路7 6會變成輸出南阻抗狀態。 另一方面,針對源極線,於源極線解碼控制電路120 中,OR閘OG3的輸出信號會變成Η位準。如此,於源極 線解碼電路122中,OR閘OG4的輸出信號會變成Η位準, NAND閘NG4的輸出信號會變成L位準。如此,於源極線 驅動電路124中,MOS電晶體NQ4會變成導通狀態,MOS 電晶體PQ4會變成非導通狀態。如此,源極線SL會結合 至接地節點。 於資料讀出時,使用未圖示的連接閘將選擇列的位元 47 319644 200830313 線、、合至電源節點,藉此電流會從位元線流通至源極 線SL,其剩餘的電流會供給至感測放大器電路,而進 行比較動作。此情形下,亦可構成為感測放大器電路乃 具有電流源,並根據讀出活性化信號的活性化而將此電流 源的電流供給至選擇位元線。 务因此,於第16圖所示的自旋注入型MRAM中,亦能 藉由利用比較器116,而於資料寫入後進行確認是否已正 常地進行寫入之驗證動作。 _ 並且’在選擇列且為非選擇行之記憶體單元中,存取 電=TRS為非導通狀態,位元線BL與源極線礼之間 的電流流通路徑會切斷。於選擇行且為非選擇列的記憶體 單元中,位元線BL及源極線SL會維持於相同的電源電壓 位準’且同樣不會流通電流。 第17圖係顯示第16圖所示的自旋注、smram的資 ,寫入時的動作之時序圖。以下,參照第17圖簡單地說明 •第16圖所示的自旋注入型MRAM的資料寫入時的動作。 指令解碼器112係根據經由連接墊PAD所接收的寫入 =示指令而將寫入指示信號Write驅動至活性狀態。此 牯,扣令解碼器112係將比較無效化信號lst-Wdte驅動 至活性狀態。 8守序產生裔114係根據來自指令解碼器112的寫入指 不,在預定的時序將寫入數位線驅動信號W-DL&寫入脈 波仏號W—PULSE驅動至活性狀態。根據來自指令解碼器 Π2的比較|效化信號lst一Write的活性化,來自比較器 48 319644 200830313 116的驗證結果指示信號P/F會固定至H位準。 =’藉由數位線解碼電路7G及數位線驅動器^的 ==於數位線流通電流,並產生補助磁場。此外, 2^=’藉由位元線解碼電路74、位元線解碼控制電 舻栌立疋線驅動器76,對應選擇列的位元線BL會 由輸入資料問鎖器65_ 源㈣或接地節點。非選擇列的位元線bl係夢 由對應的位兀線驅動電路76而維持於電源電壓位準。 後解St針對源極線SL’選擇 動聊馬控制電心 ^路124,根據寫入資料的邏輯值而結合至接地節點或 电源即點。非選擇觸源極線SL係藉由源極線驅動電路 124而結合至電源節點。W level. Thus, in the source line driving circuit 124, the MOS transistor PQ4 becomes conductive, and the MOS transistor NQ4 becomes non-conductive. As such, the source line SL is coupled to the power supply node. At this time, in the bit line decoder, the output signal of the AND gate G7 is also the L level, and therefore, the output signal of the NAND gate NG2 becomes the Η level. The output signal of the OR gate OG1 is the L level. Therefore, the output signal of the NAND circuit NK1 becomes the L level, and the output signal of the NOR circuit NRK1 becomes the L level. Thus, the bit line BL will remain at the supply voltage level 44 319644 200830313, which is accurate. In the standby state or the non-selected state, the Y address signal YADD does not - specify the corresponding bit line BL and source line 81^. Therefore, in the bit line decoding, in the circuit 74, the output signal of the NAND gate NG2 becomes 11 level, and the minus 08 transistor NQ2· becomes non-conductive. Also, the output signal of the OR gate OG1 is the L level, and therefore, the output signal of the inverter circuit IV3 is the Η level. Therefore, the output signal of the NAND circuit ΝΚ1 becomes the L level, the MOS transistor PQ2 is turned on, and the bit line BL is maintained at the power supply voltage level. The source line is also the same, the output signal of the NAND gate NG4 will become the Ή level, the MOS transistor PQ4 will become conductive, and the MOS transistor NQ4 will become the non-conductive state. Thus, the source line SL is also maintained at the power supply voltage level. The configuration of the decoding circuit and the word line driving circuit for word line selection is the same as the configuration shown in Fig. 13 except that the word line decoding circuit 80 performs the X address decoding operation at the time of writing and reading. That is, in the configuration of ▲ shown in Fig. 13, the OR gate OG1 is not used. When the data is written, the verification result indicates that the signal P/F is the Η level. At this time, the potentials of the bit line BL and the source line SL differ depending on the logical value of the write data from the input data latch 65. (1) Writing of H data: In this case, first, for the bit line, the output signal of the AND gate G7 becomes the Η level. At the time of writing, according to the write pulse signal WJPULSE, the output signal of the AND gate G3 becomes a Η level, and thus, the output signal of the NAND gate NG2 becomes a binary level. here? Assume that the corresponding 45 319644 200830313 • bit line is selected. In this case, the output signal of the NAND circuit NK1 becomes a Η level, and the MOS transistor PQ2 becomes a non-conductive state. QR gate • The output signal of OG1 is L level when data is written, and the output signal of NOR circuit NRK1 ' becomes Η level. Thus, the MOS transistor NQ2 is turned on, and the bit line BL is coupled to the ground node via the MOS transistor NQ2. On the other hand, for the source line SL, the output signal of the inverter IV4 becomes the L level, and the output signal of the AND gate G8 becomes the L level. Thus, the state of the 10 is the same as the non-selected state or the standby state, and the source line SL is coupled to the power supply node by the source line driving circuit 124. For the digit line, the output signal of the digit line driver circuit 72 becomes the L level. On the digit line DL, current flows from the power node to the ground node. Further, by the word line drive circuit (not shown), the corresponding word line is driven to the selected state, and the access transistor TRS is turned on. Thus, in this case, current flows from the source line SL to the bit line BL. The write current for this memory 10 cell MC is controlled by the gate voltage (i.e., the reference voltage Vref) of the MOS transistor NQ2 included in the bit line drive circuit 76. (2) Writing of L data: In this case, for the bit line, the output signal of the AND gate G7 will change to the L level. Thus, the output signal of the NAND gate NG1 will become the Η level. Thus, in the same manner as in the standby state, in the bit line driving circuit 76, the MOS transistor PQ2 is turned on, and the bit line BL is coupled to the power supply node.乂 · ... In the case where the L data is written to, the word \ line WL is also driven to the Η level, 46 319644 200830313 • The digit line DL is driven to the selected state and the digit line current is passed. On the other hand, for the source line, the output signal of the inverter IV4 will change to a Η level, and thus, the output signal of the AND gate G8 will become a Η level. • When the write pulse indication signal WJ>ULSE becomes clamped, the NAND gate NG4 becomes a Η level. Thus, in the source line driving circuit 124, the MOS transistor NQ4 becomes conductive, and the MOS transistor PQ4 becomes non-conductive. Thus, in this state, current flows from the bit line BL to the source line SL. At this time, the electric current flowing through the memory cell MC is controlled by the high side power supply voltage (i.e., the reference voltage Vref) of the inverter IVK4 of the source line driving circuit 124. When reading data, for the bit line, the output signal of the OR gate OG1 will become the Η level, so that the output signal of the NOR circuit NRK1 will become the L level. The output signal of the inverter IV3 will become the L level, and thus, the output signal of the NAND circuit NK1 will become the Η level. Thus, the MOS transistor PQ2 becomes non-conductive. That is, at the time of data reading, the bit line driving circuit 7 6 becomes the output south impedance state. On the other hand, for the source line, in the source line decoding control circuit 120, the output signal of the OR gate OG3 becomes a Η level. Thus, in the source line decoding circuit 122, the output signal of the OR gate OG4 becomes a Η level, and the output signal of the NAND gate NG4 becomes an L level. Thus, in the source line driving circuit 124, the MOS transistor NQ4 becomes conductive, and the MOS transistor PQ4 becomes non-conductive. Thus, the source line SL is coupled to the ground node. When reading data, use the connection gate (not shown) to connect the line of the selected column 47 319644 200830313 to the power supply node, so that the current will flow from the bit line to the source line SL, and the remaining current will be It is supplied to the sense amplifier circuit for comparison. In this case, the sense amplifier circuit may be configured to have a current source, and the current of the current source is supplied to the selected bit line in accordance with activation of the read activation signal. Therefore, in the spin injection type MRAM shown in Fig. 16, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the write operation has been normally performed after the data is written by using the comparator 116. _ and 'In the memory cell in which the column is selected and is not selected, the access = TRS is in a non-conducting state, and the current flow path between the bit line BL and the source line is cut off. In the memory cell in which the row is selected and is not selected, the bit line BL and the source line SL are maintained at the same power supply voltage level and the current does not flow. Fig. 17 is a timing chart showing the operation of the spin note, the smram, and the write operation shown in Fig. 16. Hereinafter, the operation at the time of data writing of the spin injection type MRAM shown in Fig. 16 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 17. The instruction decoder 112 drives the write instruction signal Write to an active state in accordance with a write = indication command received via the connection pad PAD. In this case, the deduction decoder 112 drives the comparison invalidation signal lst-Wdte to the active state. The sequenced generation 114 is driven to the active state by writing the digit line drive signal W-DL& write pulse apostrophe W-PULSE at a predetermined timing based on the write instruction from the instruction decoder 112. Based on the activation of the comparison |effect signal lst_Write from the instruction decoder ,2, the verification result indicating signal P/F from the comparator 48 319644 200830313 116 is fixed to the H level. =' By the digit line decoding circuit 7G and the digit line driver ^ = = current flows through the digit line, and a supplementary magnetic field is generated. In addition, 2^=' is controlled by the bit line decoding circuit 74 and the bit line decoding control unit, and the bit line BL corresponding to the selected column is input from the data block lock 65_ source (4) or the ground node. . The bit line bl of the non-selected column is maintained at the power supply voltage level by the corresponding bit line driving circuit 76. The post-solution St selects the source control line for the source line SL', and combines it with the logic value of the written data to the ground node or the power point. The non-selective source line SL is coupled to the power supply node by the source line driver circuit 124.

,在此狀態下’於位元線及源極線SL之間,電流會朝 已對應寫人貝料的遴輯值之方向流通,而執 體單元的資料寫入。 U 當經過預定期間時,寫入數位線活性化信號w—dl及 寫入脈波信號W_PULSE會被驅動至非活性化狀態(L位 準)二此寫入數位線活性化信號WJ>L_以補助選擇記 憶體早το MC的可變磁性電阻源件VR的磁化方向的變 化,亦可在比寫人脈波㈣w_puLSE還早的時序被驅動 至非活性化狀態。於第17圖中,此寫人數位線活性化信號 W 一 DL的非活性化時序亦可具有時間性寬度,而以雙向箭 頭顯示重置期間。 / 319644 49 200830313 , 當此寫入結束時(當寫入脈波信號WJPULSE被非活 性化時),比較無效化信號lst_Write會被驅動至L位準。 、於此寫入後,時序產生器114會在預定期間將驗證活性化 '信號VFREN驅動至活性狀態。當驗證活性化信號VFREN 活性化時,於位元線驅動電路76中,P通道MOS電晶體 及N通道MOS電晶體NQ2皆會變成非導通狀態,而變成 輸出南阻抗狀態。於源極線驅動電路124中,選擇列的源 極線SL亦會經由N通道MOS電晶體NQ4而結合至接地 ⑩節點。並且,藉由未圖示的字線驅動電路,字線WL會被 驅動至選擇狀態,存取電晶體TRS會導通。如此,於位元 線BL與源極線SL之間形成電流流通的路徑-。 來自感測放大器電路78的供給電流(未圖示)亦於讀 出時電流會經由將位元線BL連接至電源節點的閘電路而 流通至位元線。此位元線電流會根據記憶體單元MC的記 憶資料而變化。感測放大器電路78會感測位元線BL的電In this state, between the bit line and the source line SL, the current will flow in the direction corresponding to the value of the written material, and the data of the executing unit is written. U When the predetermined period elapses, the write digit line activation signal w_dl and the write pulse signal W_PULSE are driven to the inactive state (L level). This writes the digit line activation signal WJ>L_ The change in the magnetization direction of the variable magnetic resistance source member VR of the memory το MC can be driven to the inactive state at a timing earlier than the write pulse (4) w_puLSE. In Fig. 17, the inactivation timing of the write bit line activating signal W-DL may also have a temporal width, and the reset period is displayed in a two-way arrow. / 319644 49 200830313, When this writing ends (when the write pulse signal WJPULSE is deactivated), the comparison invalidation signal lst_Write is driven to the L level. After this write, the timing generator 114 will drive the verification activation 'signal VFREN to an active state for a predetermined period of time. When the verification activation signal VFREN is activated, in the bit line drive circuit 76, both the P channel MOS transistor and the N channel MOS transistor NQ2 become non-conductive and become output south impedance states. In the source line driver circuit 124, the source line SL of the selected column is also coupled to the ground 10 node via the N-channel MOS transistor NQ4. Further, the word line WL is driven to the selected state by the word line driving circuit (not shown), and the access transistor TRS is turned on. Thus, a path of current flow is formed between the bit line BL and the source line SL. The supply current (not shown) from the sense amplifier circuit 78 also flows to the bit line via the gate circuit that connects the bit line BL to the power supply node when read. This bit line current varies depending on the memory material of the memory cell MC. The sense amplifier circuit 78 senses the power of the bit line BL

A壓變化或電流變化。在此,感測放大器電路78係藉由感測 W 活性化信號EN的活性化而活性化(僅針對選擇列)。 在寫入不良的情形中,來自比較器116的驗證結果指 示信號P/F為Η位準。因此,當此驗證結果信號VRFEN 被非活性化時,時序產生器114會再次以預定的順序將寫 入數位線活性化信號W—DL及寫入脈波信號W—PULSE驅 動至活性狀態,並再次執行對記憶體單元MC的再寫入。 接著,再次執行寫入後的驗證動作。當藉由驗證活性 化信號VRFEN而進行驗證動作時,當已正常地進行寫入 50 319644 200830313 .後,來自比較器m的驗證結果指示信號p/F會變成l 位準。如此,時序產生器丨j 4會將 — 曰將用M使舄入指示信號 'Wme非活性化的信號供給至指令解碼器ιΐ2並結束資料 ,的寫入。在此情形中為待機狀態,位元線机及源極線儿 會藉由位元線驅動電路76及源極線驅動電路124而於 電源電屢位準。因此,數位線沉係會藉由數位線驅動電 路72雨維持於電源電壓位準。 …於此待機狀態中’來自比較器116的驗證結果指示信 馨號P /F只要设定成初始狀態即可。 時序產生器114係例如以順序控制器(se㈣職 C〇ntr〇ller)所構成,係根據來自指令解碼器ιΐ2的寫入指 示信號或讀出指示信號,以預定的順序來產生寫入脈波^ 號W_PULSE、寫入數位線活性化信號w—dl、以及驗證活 性化信號VFREN (考慮驗證結果指示信號p/F的邏二位 準)〇 指令解碼器112係根據來自外部的指令來產生脈波信 號,並藉由時序產生器114來規定脈波信號的非活性化^ 序,藉此能產生寫人指示信號WHte及讀出指示信Μ-。 如上所述,依據本發明的實施形態_.,於磁性記憶體 (MRAM)中’在資料寫人後執行_認是否已正常地進行 寫入之驗證動作。因此,能實現高可靠性的資料寫入。 此外,在寫入不良的情形下,MRAM會回復至寫入前 的初始狀態。因此,即使以相同的寫入條件來進行再寫入, 由於熱對於電子自..旋狀態的影響,藉由重複進行再寫入的 319644 51 200830313 二敛%降低產生寫入不良的概率,而能保證確實的資料 寫入。此時’如同後述的實施形態所說明,亦可於 曹 寫時變更寫入條件。 ' 〔貫施形態二〕 第18圖係顯示本發明的實施形態二的自旋注入 MRAM,寫人順序之時序圖。以下,參照f 18圖說明本 發明的實施形態:# MRAM㈣人順序。在此,作 mRAM、m!觸變MRAM及自雜人型嫩的任二 f中皆進行相同的動作(關於雙態觸變mram,係於後述 說明)。 MRAM係與時脈信號CLK同步地取入來自外部的指 T CMD及位址信號AD。並且,内部的動作循環 亦藉由時脈信號CLK來規定。 八在從時刻T0開始的循環中,係接收寫入指令作為指 τ CMD,並接收位址信號AD〇作為來自外部的位址信號 AD 〇 口儿 根據此寫入指令,會在内部以單觸發脈波(〇ne sh加 pulse)的型態來產生寫入模式指示信號Φ W。根據此寫入 模式指示信號(DW,寫人指示信Write會於預定期間變 成活性狀愍。根據此寫入指示信號Write,寫入數位線驅 動信號W—DL及寫入脈波信號W—PULSE會被活性化。於 第一次寫入時,比較無效化信號lst—Write會被活性化。 於寫入時,發送忙碌(busy) /就緒(ready)信號B / RZ至外部,表示寫入中^ 319644 52 200830313 ^ 接著,在從時刻το開始的循環中,當寫入結束時, 寫入指示信號Write會被非活性化,比較無效化信號 1 st_Write會被非活性化。響應此寫入指示信號Write的非 '活性化,寫入驗證活性化信號VFREN會被活性化,並將 來自寫入對象的記憶體單元的讀出資料及寫入資料與内部 讀出資料進行比較。當為寫入不良時,驗證結果指示信號 P/F為Η位準。 在從時刻Τ1開始的循環中,根據Η位準的驗證結果 _指示信號P/F,會再次以單觸發脈波的型態供給寫入模式 指示信號Φ W。如此,會再次針對相同位址執行寫入並執 行寫入驗證動作。在從時刻Τ1開始的循環中,於外部, 忙碌/就緒信號B/RZ為Η位準,於此循環中,係禁止 來自外部的存取。 根據驗證結果,當顯示已正常地進行寫入時,驗證結 果指示信號P / F會變成L位準。如此,忙綠/就緒信號Β 鲁/RZ會被設定至L位準,而被設定成容許存取狀態。 因此,在從時刻Τ2開始的循環中,處理器(processer) (或控制器)能針對MRAM進行存取(資料的寫入或讀 ---------------出十。--------------- — 如第18圖所示,在與時脈信號CLK同步進行動作的 情形下,在内部寫入期間中對外部傳送忙碌/就緒信號B /RZ,藉此,外部的處理器(或控制器)能得知MRAM 的内部狀態。 當寫入不良時,會在内部產生寫入模式指示信號Φ" 53 319644 200830313 W ’並等義地發送内部耷 序進行寫入驗證後的再寫=,藉此’即使以相同的觸 — 時’亦能執行寫入。 / 19圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態二的自旋注 =型祖μ的指令解碼器112及時序產生器u :。此指令解碼器112係對應第15圖所示的自旋注入= MRAM的指令解碼器112。 於第圖中’指令解碼器112係包含有:寫入指令檢 /电路202係與8^脈信號CLK同步地取入來自外部的指 7 C^D並仏,則疋否接收有寫入指令;電路綱,係 接收寫入指令檢測電路2〇2的輸出信號與來自時序產生器 1H的再寫人指示信號φψΙ;以及寫人活性化電路施了 ,根據OR私路204輸出的寫入模式指示信號來產生 舄入指示信號Write。 t寫入指令檢測電路2〇2係在時脈信號CLK上升時檢測 才曰令CMD是否為寫入指令。指令CMD係可組合複數個信 的邏輯位準來供給,亦可作為一個已解碼的信號來^ 給。寫入指令檢測電路20.2係當檢測出寫入指令時,會產 生單觸發的脈波信號。如此,在0R電路2〇4接收來自外 部的寫入指令時或從時序產生器21〇接收再寫入指示信號 Φ WI 8守’會將舄入指不信號φ ^活性化。再寫入指示信 號ΦΨΙ係具有與寫入指令檢測電路202所產生的脈波信 號相同的脈波寬度,並將此再寫入指示信號〇Wl作為内部 寫入指令來利用。 舄入活,性化電路2 0 6係響應寫入模式指示信號φ $厂的 319644 54 200830313 活性化,將具有預定時間寬度的脈波信 號Write來產生。 號作為寫 入指示信 • I令解=器叫复包含有預讀禁止電路2〇8,係 舄入杈式私示信號φ w來產生比較▲'、根據 1 st—WHte。預讀禁止電路2〇8係根據寫式、二_,信號 W的活性化來產生具有與寫入指示信號心=, 寬度之單觸發的脈波信號,並於第—次的寫人時 入對象的記憶體單元之資料讀出及比較動作,㈣彳= 時序產生器114係相當於第15圖所示的日± T舄入° 114。此時序產生器114係包含有寫入電流驅動活性化電: =,係《來自指令解碼器2⑻的g人模式指示信號φ % 來產生馬入控制信號W_DL及w一PULS]E。mram為自旋 注入型MRAM,此寫入電流驅動活性化電路2ιι係根據^ 入模式指示信號(DW於預定時序產生寫人數位線驅動^號 W-DL·與寫入脈波信號w_pijls;e。 儿 ⑩ s守序產生态114復包含有:驗證活性化電路212,係 響應來自指令解碼器112的寫入指示信號Write的非活性 化來產生驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN;以及忙碌信號產生 電路213,係根據驗證結果指示信號p/F來產生杧碌/就 緒信號B/RZ。 驗證活性化電路212係例如由用以產生單觸發的脈波 信號之電路所構成,並響應寫入指示信號Write朝非活性 化之移行,而於預定期間將驗證讀出活性化信號vfren 維持在活性狀難。 … _ 55 319644 200830313 忙碌信號產生電路213係於寫入模式時,根據驗證結 果指不信號P/F來產生忙碌/就緒信號B/RZ。當構成 為表不忙碌狀態時忙碌//就緒信號B/RZ會設定至H位 準之情形時,此忙碌信號產生電路213係以緩衝電路所構 成。另一方面,當構成為表示忙碌狀態時忙碌/就緒信號 B/RZ g β又疋至l位準之情形時,忙綠信號產生電路2工3 係以反相電路所構成。 驗證結果指示信號!VF係於待機狀態時被設定成l I位準。 寸序產生為114復包含有:閃鎖器214,係在驗證讀 f活性化信號VFREN的活性化時變成通過(through)狀 ^ ^驗也結果指不信號p/F通過;以及脈波產生電路 士糸根據問鎖益214的輸出信號與時脈信號CM來產 生再舄入指示信號①WI。 閃鎖器214係在驗★發士矣山、工& , ϋ項出活性化信號VFREN的非活 性化時變成閂鎖狀能。备門 睹,日^太 心田問鎖裔21斗的輸出信號為Η位準 、 W皮產生電路215係與時脈f ^ 罝辟机π丄 〇时脈仏號CLK的上升同步,以 早觸發脈波的型態來產生再 — 部耷Α私人 冉舄入私不信號Φ WI以作為内 I5寫入才日令。於驗證時,亦 動作控制來執行寫人。在此U 格令施加時相同的 蚪,於雙態觸變MRAM中 知丁U虎的毛达 循環中的Α ο貝動作冒停止。之後的寫入 、•’祖動作會對應再寫入時读 入循環的時間。 員靖動作,而細紐寫A pressure change or current change. Here, the sense amplifier circuit 78 is activated by sensing the activation of the W activation signal EN (only for the selected column). In the case of poor writing, the verification result from the comparator 116 indicates that the signal P/F is at the Η level. Therefore, when the verification result signal VRFEN is deactivated, the timing generator 114 drives the write digit line activation signal W_DL and the write pulse signal W_PULSE to the active state again in a predetermined order, and Rewriting to the memory cell MC is performed again. Next, the verification operation after writing is performed again. When the verifying action is performed by verifying the activation signal VRFEN, the verification result indicating signal p/F from the comparator m becomes the l level after the writing 50 319644 200830313 has been normally performed. In this way, the timing generator 丨j 4 will supply the signal that the intrusion indication signal 'Wme is deactivated to the instruction decoder ι2 with M and end the writing of the data. In this case, in the standby state, the bit line machine and the source line are repeatedly leveled by the bit line driving circuit 76 and the source line driving circuit 124. Therefore, the digital line sinking system is maintained at the power supply voltage level by the digital line driving circuit 72. ...in this standby state, the verification result indication signal P/F from the comparator 116 is only required to be set to the initial state. The timing generator 114 is configured, for example, by a sequence controller (se), and generates a write pulse in a predetermined order based on a write instruction signal or a read instruction signal from the instruction decoder ι2. The ^W_PULSE, the write digit line activation signal w_dl, and the verification activation signal VFREN (considering the logic level of the verification result indication signal p/F), the instruction decoder 112 generates pulses according to instructions from the outside. The wave signal is used to define the inactivation of the pulse signal by the timing generator 114, whereby the write indication signal WHte and the read indication signal - can be generated. As described above, according to the embodiment of the present invention, in the magnetic memory (MRAM), the verification operation of whether or not the writing has been normally performed is performed after the data is written. Therefore, high reliability data writing can be realized. In addition, in the case of poor write, the MRAM will revert to the initial state before writing. Therefore, even if rewriting is performed under the same writing condition, the probability of writing failure is caused by the reduction of the 219644 51 200830313 repetition of the rewriting due to the influence of heat on the spin state of the electron. Can guarantee the actual data to be written. At this time, as described in the embodiment described later, the writing condition can be changed at the time of Cao writing. [Embodiment 2] Fig. 18 is a timing chart showing the spin injection MRAM of the second embodiment of the present invention. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 18: #MRAM(四) Person order. Here, the same operation is performed for both the mRAM, the m! thixotropic MRAM, and the self-mutilation type (the two-state thixotropic mram is described later). The MRAM system takes in the external T CMD and the address signal AD from the outside in synchronization with the clock signal CLK. Moreover, the internal operation cycle is also specified by the clock signal CLK. 8. In the loop starting from time T0, the write command is received as the finger τ CMD, and the address signal AD is received as the address signal AD from the external port. According to the write command, it is internally triggered by one shot. The mode of the pulse wave (〇ne sh plus pulse) generates a write mode indication signal Φ W . According to the write mode indication signal (DW, the write command letter Write becomes active during a predetermined period. According to the write instruction signal Write, the digital line drive signal W_DL and the write pulse signal W-PULSE are written. Will be activated. In the first write, the comparison invalidation signal lst_Write will be activated. When writing, send busy / ready signal B / RZ to the outside, indicating write中^ 319644 52 200830313 ^ Next, in the loop starting from time το, when the writing ends, the write instruction signal Write is deactivated, and the comparison invalidation signal 1 st_Write is deactivated. When the indication signal Write is not 'activated, the write verification activation signal VFREN is activated, and the read data and the write data from the memory unit to be written are compared with the internal read data. When the input is bad, the verification result indication signal P/F is the Η level. In the cycle starting from the time Τ1, the verification result _ indication signal P/F according to the Η level is again supplied as a one-shot pulse wave type. Write mode indication No. Φ W. In this way, the write operation is performed again for the same address and the write verify operation is performed. In the loop starting from time Τ1, the busy/ready signal B/RZ is external, in this loop. The access from the outside is prohibited. According to the verification result, when the display has been normally written, the verification result indication signal P / F will become the L level. Thus, the busy green / ready signal / / RZ will be set To the L level, it is set to allow access. Therefore, in the loop from time Τ2, the processor (or controller) can access the MRAM (write or read data)- -------------10.--------------- - As shown in Figure 18, in the case of synchronization with the clock signal CLK Next, the busy/ready signal B /RZ is transmitted to the outside during the internal writing period, whereby the external processor (or controller) can know the internal state of the MRAM. When the writing is bad, the writing is internally generated. Incoming mode indication signal Φ" 53 319644 200830313 W 'and equivalently send internal sequence for write verification after rewriting =, borrow The writing can be performed even with the same touch time. / 19 The figure schematically shows the instruction decoder 112 and the timing generator u of the spin type = type 祖 of the second embodiment of the present invention. The decoder 112 corresponds to the spin decoder = MRAM instruction decoder 112 shown in Fig. 15. In the figure, the 'instruction decoder 112 includes: the write command detection/circuit 202 is synchronized with the 8 pulse signal CLK. If the finger 7 C^D is taken in from the outside, then the write command is received; the circuit outline receives the output signal of the write command detection circuit 2〇2 and the rewriter indication from the timing generator 1H. The signal φψΙ; and the write activation circuit are applied, and the write indication signal Write is generated according to the write mode indication signal output from the OR private channel 204. The t write command detecting circuit 2 〇 2 detects whether the CMD is a write command when the clock signal CLK rises. The command CMD can be supplied by combining the logical levels of a plurality of letters, or as a decoded signal. The write command detection circuit 20.2 generates a one-shot pulse wave signal when a write command is detected. Thus, when the OR circuit 2〇4 receives a write command from the external or receives the rewrite instruction signal from the timing generator 21〇, Φ WI 8 ’ will activate the 指instruction signal φ^. The rewrite instruction signal Φ has the same pulse width as the pulse signal generated by the write command detecting circuit 202, and the rewrite instruction signal 〇W1 is used as an internal write command. Intrusion, the sexualization circuit 2 0 6 is responsive to the write mode indication signal φ $ 319644 54 200830313 activation, which is generated by a pulse signal Write having a predetermined time width. The number is used as a write instructing letter. • The I command solution includes a pre-reading inhibiting circuit 2〇8, and the 私-type private signal φ w is input to generate a comparison ▲', according to 1 st-WHte. The pre-reading inhibiting circuit 2〇8 generates a pulse wave signal having a one-shot with the heart of the write indication signal according to the activation of the write mode, the second signal, and the W, and enters the first time of the write time. The data reading and comparison operation of the memory cell of the object, (4) 彳 = timing generator 114 is equivalent to the day ± T ° ° 114 shown in Fig. 15. The timing generator 114 includes a write current to drive the activating power: =, the "G human mode indication signal φ % from the instruction decoder 2 (8) to generate the horse-in control signal W_DL and w-PULS] E. The mram is a spin injection type MRAM, and the write current drive activation circuit 2 is based on the input mode indication signal (DW generates a write bit line drive number W-DL and a write pulse wave signal w_pijls at a predetermined timing; e The 10s s order generation state 114 includes: a verification activation circuit 212 that generates a verification read activation signal VFREN in response to inactivation of the write indication signal Write from the instruction decoder 112; and a busy signal generation The circuit 213 generates a current/ready signal B/RZ according to the verification result indication signal p/F. The verification activation circuit 212 is composed of, for example, a circuit for generating a one-shot pulse wave signal, and responds to the write indication. The signal Write moves toward inactivation, and it is difficult to verify that the read activation signal vfren is active in a predetermined period. _ 55 319644 200830313 When the busy signal generation circuit 213 is in the write mode, it does not signal according to the verification result. P/F to generate the busy/ready signal B/RZ. When the busy//ready signal B/RZ is set to the H level when the busy state is configured, the busy signal generating circuit 213 is On the other hand, when the busy/ready signal B/RZ g β is again set to the l-level when the busy state is formed, the busy green signal generating circuit 2 is constructed by an inverter circuit. The verification result indication signal!VF is set to the l I level when it is in the standby state. The order generation is 114 and includes: the flash locker 214, which passes through the activation of the verification read f activation signal VFREN ( The result of the test also means that the signal p/F is not passed; and the pulse wave generating circuit generates a re-intrusion indication signal 1WI according to the output signal of the lock 214 and the clock signal CM. In the test, the 发 矣 、 、, gong & ϋ 出 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 活性 。 。 。 The W-skin generation circuit 215 is synchronized with the rise of the clock φ 丄〇 丄〇 clock CLK CLK, to generate the waveform of the pulse wave early to generate a re--partial 冉舄 private 私 private signal Φ The WI is written as the internal I5. At the time of verification, the action control is also performed to execute the writer. This U-grain is applied with the same flaw, and in the two-state thixotropic MRAM, the ο 贝 动作 action in the Ma Da loop of the D-U is stopped. After the write, the • ancestor action will be read corresponding to the re-write. Into the cycle time.

在已正常地進.行寫入時’由於驗證結果指示信號p/F 319644 56 200830313 會灸成L·位準,故脈波產生電路 a 能在已正常寫入後的下一個循環中,防:產生::。'此―’ 信號Φ wi作為内部寫入指令。 舄入指不 —如上所述,在内部進行寫入時,進行驗證動作,而在 ::入=時’會在内部產生對應寫入指令的再 示 =二此,能確實地進行資料的寫人。並且, ς 或控制器。藉此,於_中,能 {的處理器 間確實地防止來自外部的存取。進仃"料的再寫入期 〔變形例〕 第2〇圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態二的變形 之雙態觸變通AM的指令解碼器62及時序產生器64的構 成圖。於第20圖中,指令解碼器62係包含有:寫入指令 檢測電路22,係與時脈信號CLK同步地,取人來自外部 的才曰々CMD並產生舄入指示檢測信號①,;以及寫入活 性化電路224,係根據來自時序產生器、64的内冑寫入檢測 信號(再寫人指示信號)ΦΜ與時脈信號CLK來產生寫 入指示信號Write。 … 當再寫入指示信號(D WI被活性化時,寫入活性化電路 224會與時脈信號CLK的下降同步地產生預定時間寬度的 寫入指示信號Write。 日寸序產生裔64係包含有·寫入電流驅動活性化電路 231,係根據寫入指示信號Write的活性化,以預定的順序 產生寫入數位線驅動信號W_DL及寫入位元線驅動信號 319644 57 200830313 W一BL;以及驗證活性化電路232,係根據來自指令解螞哭 ‘ 62的寫入檢測信號cdwf與寫入活性化信號來產2 驗證活性化信號VFREN。 此驗證活性化電路232係響應寫入模式檢測信號① WF的活性化或寫入指示信號Wdte的非活性化,而以^有 預定時間寬度的單觸發脈波的型態來產生驗證讀出活性化 k號VFREN。此驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN的脈波寬度 係在内部讀出資料及進行内部讀出資料與寫入資料的邏輯 曝的一致判斷時所需的時間寬度。 時序產生器64復包含有:忙碌信號產生電路233,係 根據驗證結果指示信號P/F來產生忙碌/就緒信號 RZ,閂鎖益234,係響應驗證.讀出活性化信號Vfren的 非活性化來問鎖驗證結果指示信號p/ F ;以及脈波產生電 路235 ’係根據閂鎖器234的輪出信號與驗證讀出活性化 信號VFREN來產生内部.寫入指示信號(再寫入指示信號) φ Φ WI 〇 儿 忙碌信號產生電路233係於寫入模式時,根據驗證結 果指示信號P/F來產生忙碌/準備信號B/Rz。當驗證 結果指示信號P/F在待機狀態時為l位準時,忙綠信號 產生電路233係常時根據此驗證結果指示信號ρ/ ρ來產 生忙碌/準備信號B/RZ。 當驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN為Η位準,且執行内 部資料讀出時’閂鎖器234會變成通過( through )狀態, 且當驗證讀出活性化信號.VFREN會變成L,位尊,内部讀 319644 58 200830313 出、、^時,閂鎖器234會變成閂鎖狀態。 §驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN下降時且閂鎖器234 的=出k就為Η位準時,脈波產生電路235會以單觸發的 形1產生内部寫入指示信號(再寫入指示信號)(D WI。 w第21圖係顯不第20圖所示的指令解碼器62與時序產 生器一64的動作之時序®。以下,參照第21 W,說明第2〇 圖所示的指令解碼器62及時序產生器64的動作。 在刻ΤΗ)開始的循環中,會與時脈信號同 步地接收寫入指令作為指令⑽及接收位址信號細作 為位址信號AD。根據此寫入指令,寫入指令檢測電路加 會以單觸發脈波的形態來產生寫入指示檢測信號①卿。根 據此寫入指示檢測信號〇WF的活性化,驗證活性化電路 =2會將驗證讀出活性化信號vfre料以活性化。此時, 寫入指示信號Wdte為非活性化狀態。在内部進行預:, 判斷寫入對象的記憶體單元的記憶資料與寫入資料的^輯 值為-致或不-致。當此判斷結果為不一致時 指示信號1>/!?為H位準。如此, 、、Ό果 如此,閂鎖态234的輸出信號 為Η位準,脈波產生電路235會與此驗證讀出活性化信號 VFREN的下賴步地以單觸發脈波信號的形態來產生再u 寫入指示信號Φ WI。 此時,根據驗證結果指示錢"F,忙碌/準備 B/RZ為Η位準而顯示忙碌狀態(經由忙綠信號 ς 233 )。 电略 號Φ WI,寫入活、性 319644 根據此f單觸發脈波的再寫入指示信 200830313 化電路224 f與時脈信號CLK的下降同步,將寫入指示信 號Wdte驅動至活性狀態。在第21圖中,此寫入指示俨號 係在時脈信號CLK為L位準的期間設定。然而,此U 寫入指示信號的活性化期間亦可比時脈信號clk 準期間還短。 當寫入指示信號Write活性化時,寫入電流驅動活性 化電路231會活性化,且寫入數位線驅動信號w沉及寫 入位元線驅動信號W_BL會以預定順序依序活性化。 在從時刻ni開始的猶環中,響應寫入指示信號w伽 的非活性化,|自驗證活性化電路232的驗證讀出活性化 信號/FREN會活性化。如此,在内部執行針對寫入資料 的驗證。當驗證結果顯示寫入不良時,在内部,再寫入指 示信號會再次活性化,接著,寫入活性化電路⑽ ^將寫入指示信號Wdte予以活性化。寫人數位線驅動信 lu W:DL及寫入位元線驅動信號W-BL會再次活性化,而 |執行資料的再寫入。 在從時刻mi始的循環中,當寫人指示信號w伽 =聽時,驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN會活性化而進 仃判b/f動作。此時,當正當谁/宦 …正昂進仃舄入時,驗證結果指示信 會下降至驗證讀出活性化信號vf卿 門二至^位準時’問鎖器234的輸出信號為L位準且處於 二狀悲。因此,脈波產生電路235不會產生脈波,再寫When the line is written normally, 'Because the verification result indication signal p/F 319644 56 200830313 will be moxibusted to the L· level, the pulse wave generating circuit a can be prevented in the next cycle after the normal writing. :produce::. The 'this' signal Φ wi is used as an internal write command. Intrusion refers to - as described above, when writing internally, the verification operation is performed, and when::==, 'will generate a corresponding write command internally=two, and the data can be written reliably. people. And, ς or controller. Thereby, in _, the processor can reliably prevent access from the outside. (Revision) The second diagram is a view schematically showing the configuration of the instruction decoder 62 and the timing generator 64 of the two-state toggle-through AM according to the modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 20, the instruction decoder 62 includes: a write command detection circuit 22 that takes a person from the external CMD and generates an intrusion indication detection signal 1 in synchronization with the clock signal CLK; The write activation circuit 224 generates the write instruction signal Write based on the internal write detection signal (rewrite human indication signal) Φ Μ and the clock signal CLK from the timing generator 64. When the instruction signal is rewritten (D WI is activated, the write activation circuit 224 generates a write instruction signal Write of a predetermined time width in synchronization with the fall of the clock signal CLK. The write current drive activation circuit 231 generates the write digit line drive signal W_DL and the write bit line drive signal 319644 57 200830313 W-BL in a predetermined order according to the activation of the write instruction signal Write; The verification activation circuit 232 generates a verification activation signal VFREN based on the write detection signal cdwf and the write activation signal from the command Crypoke 62. The verification activation circuit 232 responds to the write mode detection signal 1 The activation or writing of WF indicates the inactivation of the signal Wdte, and the verification of the read-activated k-number VFREN is generated by the type of the single-shot pulse having a predetermined time width. This verification reads the activation signal VFREN. The pulse width is the time width required to read the data internally and perform the consistent judgment of the logical read of the internal read data and the written data. The timing generator 64 includes: a busy signal The circuit 233 generates a busy/ready signal RZ according to the verification result indication signal P/F, and latches the benefit 234, and responds to the verification. The inactivation of the read activation signal Vfren is used to request the lock verification result indication signal p/F. And the pulse wave generating circuit 235' generates an internal write command signal (rewrite indication signal) according to the turn-off signal of the latch 234 and the verification read activation signal VFREN. φ Φ WI 忙 busy signal generation circuit When the 233 is in the write mode, the busy/preparation signal B/Rz is generated according to the verification result instruction signal P/F. When the verification result indication signal P/F is 1 level in the standby state, the busy green signal generation circuit 233 is The busy/preparation signal B/RZ is always generated based on the verification result indicating signal ρ/ρ. When the read-activating active signal VFREN is verified as the Η level, and the internal data reading is performed, the latch 234 becomes a pass (through State, and when verifying that the activation signal is read. VFREN will become L, the position is respected, and when the internal reading 319644 58 200830313 is output, the latch 234 will become latched. § Verify that the read activation signal VFREN drops When the value of the latch 234 is Η, the pulse wave generating circuit 235 generates an internal write indication signal (rewrite the indication signal) in the form of a one-shot (D WI. w Figure 21 shows The timing of the operation of the instruction decoder 62 and the timing generator 64 shown in Fig. 20 is not shown. Hereinafter, the operation of the instruction decoder 62 and the timing generator 64 shown in Fig. 2 will be described with reference to the 21st W. In the cycle starting from the start, the write command is received as the command (10) and the received address signal is fined as the address signal AD in synchronization with the clock signal. According to this write command, the write command detection circuit adds a write indication detection signal 1 in the form of a one-shot pulse. Based on this writing, the activation of the detection signal 〇WF is verified, and verification of the activation circuit = 2 will verify that the read activation signal vfre is activated. At this time, the write instruction signal Wdte is in an inactive state. Pre-processing internally: It is judged whether the memory data of the memory unit to be written and the data of the written data are - or not. When the result of this determination is inconsistent, the indication signal 1>/!? is the H level. Thus, the result is that the output signal of the latched state 234 is the Η level, and the pulse wave generating circuit 235 generates the singularity of the readout activation signal VFREN in the form of a one-shot pulse signal. Then u write the indication signal Φ WI. At this time, according to the verification result, the money "F, busy/preparation B/RZ is displayed as the level of the busy state (via the busy green signal ς 233). The electric code Φ WI, the write activity 319644 is based on the re-write indication signal of the f-trigger pulse wave. The control circuit 224 f is driven in synchronization with the falling of the clock signal CLK to drive the write instruction signal Wdte to the active state. In Fig. 21, the write indication apostrophe is set during the period in which the clock signal CLK is at the L level. However, the activation period of the U write indication signal may also be shorter than the clock signal clk quasi-period. When the write instructing signal Write is activated, the write current drive activating circuit 231 is activated, and the write digit line drive signal w sink and the write bit line drive signal W_BL are sequentially activated in a predetermined order. In the circadian ring from the time ni, in response to the inactivation of the write instruction signal w, the verification read activation signal /FREN of the self-verification activation circuit 232 is activated. In this way, verification for written data is performed internally. When the verification result indicates that the write is defective, the rewrite instruction signal is internally activated again, and then the write activation circuit (10) ^ activates the write instruction signal Wdte. Write the number of bit line drive letters lu W: DL and the write bit line drive signal W-BL will be activated again, and | In the loop from the time mi, when the writer instructs the signal w gamma = listen, the verification read activation signal VFREN is activated to determine the b/f action. At this time, when the right/who is positively entering, the verification result indication signal is lowered to verify that the readout activation signal vf is clear to the second level and the output signal of the locker 234 is the L level and In a second sorrow. Therefore, the pulse wave generating circuit 235 does not generate a pulse wave and writes again.

的= = 不會產生。響應驗證結果指示信號iVF π活性化,與時脈信號CLK的上升同步地忙碌/準備作 319644 60 200830313 '號Β/RZ被會驅動至l位準。 ’忙碌’準備信號B/Rz亦可根據驗證結果护— M ’不與時脈信號CLK同步而設定至l位果^日- 如第21圖所示,雖缺,尹我w A 卡 « /T丁雖然化費從驗證期間的時 •始的循環以及從時刻T12開妒 π / —丄 1開 準備信號β/RZ,能確實地苹止來 Μ 不i木自外部的處理器赤批細 ㈣存取。因此,外部存取會在刻 =制 後半段循環中獲得許可。開始的循環的 如上所述,依據本發明的實施形態二,在内部進行 入驗證動作的_,外部的處理㈣㈣H能確實地得知 内部處於㈣驗證㈣中,故諸止來自外部的存取與内 部驗證動作的衝突。 〔實施形態三〕 第22圖係概略地顯示本發明實施形態三的雙離觸變 MRAM的指令解碼器62及時序產生器64的構成圖^在第 22圖所示的構成中,時序產生器料係與第2〇圖所示的時 序產生器64的構成不同。亦即,在時序產生器64中設置= = will not be generated. The response verification result indication signal iVF π is activated, and is busy/prepared in synchronization with the rise of the clock signal CLK 319644 60 200830313 'No. Β / RZ is driven to the l level. 'Busy' preparation signal B/Rz can also be based on the verification result - M 'not synchronized with the clock signal CLK and set to 1 bit ^ day - as shown in Figure 21, although missing, Yin I w A card « / Though the T-Ding is from the time of the verification period and the time from the time T12 to the opening of the π / - 丄 1 to open the preparation signal β / RZ, it can be surely stopped. (4) Access. Therefore, external access is licensed in the second half of the cycle. As described above, according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the external verification processing (4) (4) H can surely know that the internal is in the (4) verification (4), so that the external access and the external access are performed. Internal verification action conflicts. [Embodiment 3] Fig. 22 is a view schematically showing a configuration of a command decoder 62 and a timing generator 64 of a dual-disengagement MRAM according to a third embodiment of the present invention. In the configuration shown in Fig. 22, a timing generator The material system is different from the configuration of the timing generator 64 shown in Fig. 2 . That is, set in the timing generator 64

有切換龟路240,係在每次驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN 活性化時,切換來自脈波產生電路235的脈波信號(再寫 入才曰不信號)〇>WI的傳達路徑;以及再寫入要求發送電路 242’係根據來自切換電路240的脈波信號來發送再寫入要 求 WREQ 〇 切換電路240會響應驗證讀出活性化信號VFREn第 一次的活性化,將來自脈波產生電路235的脈破信號(再 61 319644 200830313 ‘窝入指示信號0>WI)供給至寫入活性化電路224。響應 •證讀出活性化信號VFREN第二次的活性化,切換電 會將來自脈波產生電路235的脈波信號(再寫入指示信 CDWI供給至再寫入要求發送電路%。再寫入要求二; =242會響應來自切換電路24〇的脈波信號的上升:將再 寫入要求WREQ予以活性化(予以發送)。 '第22圖所示的指令解碼器62及時序產生器料的另一 構成係與第2G圖所示的時序產生器64及指令解碼器a j構成相同’在對應的部分附上相同的參照號碼並省略其 詳細說明。 /、 ”第23圖係顯示帛22圖所示的指令解碼器|及時序產 生為W的動作之時序圖。以下,參照第23圖,說明第U 圖所不的指令解碼器62及時序產生器64的動作。 入在從1刻丁20開始的時脈循環中,會同時接收寫入指 止仏號AD0。根據舄入指令,寫入指令檢測電路222 籲 生舄入私示檢測指號Φ WF。如此,驗證活性化電路 232會將驗證讀出活性化信號WREN予以活性化。根據驗 證頃出活性化信號VF麵,會讀出寫入對象的記憶體單元 的=°#從内部所讀出的記憶體單元的資料與寫入資料 2輯位準不—致時,與第2G圖所示的構成相同,脈波產 电路235會以單觸發脈波信號的形態來產生再寫入指示 信號Φ WI。 一 $刀換包路240會響應驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN第 的…丨生化’〜將來自脈波產生電路235的脈波信號<DWr 62 319644 200830313 •供給至寫入活性化電路224。如此,寫入指示信號Write 會活性化,接著,藉由寫入電流驅動活性化電路231,驅 ’動信號W_DL及W_BL會依序活性化。 ' 在從時刻T21開始的時脈循環中,當寫入結束時,驗 證活性化電路232會再次將驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN 予以活性化。切換電路240會響應第二次的驗證讀出活性 化信號VFREN,雨切換其連接路徑,並將脈波產生電路 235所輸出的再寫入指示信號OWI供給至再寫入要求發送 ⑩電路242。 在寫入時的寫入驗證中,當檢測出寫入不良時,驗證 結果指示信號P/F為Η位準。因此,脈波產生電路235 會再次以單觸發脈波的形態來產生再寫入指示信號φ WI。此時,切換電路240會將脈波產生電路235所輸出的 再寫入指示信號OWI供給至再寫入要求發送電路242。再 寫入要求發送電路242會根據該接收的再寫入指示信號φ 馨WI來發送再寫入要求WREQ。根據此再寫入要求WREQ, 外部的處理器或控制器會再次供給寫入指令與相同位址 AD0。因此,在從時刻Τ22開始的循環中,會再次執行與 從時刻T20開始的循環相同的動作。 當在内部產生寫入不良時,會發送寫入要求至外部的 處理器或控制器,藉此外部的處理器或控制器能確實地檢 測出寫入狀態。如此,能監控寫入不良的產生次數等,而 採取必要的處置。 •並且,再寫入要求WREQ亦可與時脈信號CLK的上 63 319644 200830313 的期間,亦 ^升同步地發送。此外,從時刻T20至時刻T22 可為外部的時脈信號的一時脈循環期間。 〔變形例〕The switching turtle path 240 switches the transmission path of the pulse wave signal (rewriting signal) from the pulse wave generating circuit 235 every time the verification activation signal VFREN is activated, and the communication path of the WI; The re-write request transmission circuit 242' transmits a re-write request WREQ according to the pulse wave signal from the switching circuit 240. The switching circuit 240 responds to the verification activation of the activation signal VFREn for the first time, and generates the pulse wave. The pulse breaking signal of the circuit 235 (further 61 319644 200830313 'dot indication signal 0 gt; WI) is supplied to the write activating circuit 224. In response to the second activation of the activation activation signal VFREN, the switching power supplies the pulse wave signal from the pulse wave generating circuit 235 (rewriting the indication signal CDWI to the rewriting request transmission circuit %. Requirement 2; = 242 will respond to the rise of the pulse signal from the switching circuit 24A: the WREQ is rewritten to be activated (transmitted). The instruction decoder 62 and the timing generator shown in Fig. 22 The other configuration is the same as the timing generator 64 and the command decoder aj shown in FIG. 2G. The same reference numerals will be given to the corresponding portions, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. /, Fig. 23 shows the figure 22 The illustrated instruction decoder | and the timing chart of the operation of the timing generation W. Hereinafter, the operation of the instruction decoder 62 and the timing generator 64 which are not shown in the U diagram will be described with reference to Fig. 23. In the clock cycle starting at 20, the write finger stop signal AD0 is simultaneously received. According to the write-in command, the write command detection circuit 222 calls for the insertion of the private detection finger number Φ WF. Thus, the verification activation circuit 232 will Will verify the readout activation signal WREN According to the verification, the VF surface of the activation signal is output, and the memory cell of the object to be written is read = °# The data of the memory cell read from the inside and the data of the write data are not accurate. At the same time as the configuration shown in Fig. 2G, the pulse wave generating circuit 235 generates the rewrite instruction signal Φ WI in the form of a one-shot pulse wave signal. The one-knife change packet 240 is activated in response to the verification readout. The signal VFREN is ... the biochemical '~ pulse signal from the pulse wave generating circuit 235 < DWr 62 319644 200830313 • is supplied to the write activation circuit 224. Thus, the write instruction signal Write is activated, and then, The activation current circuit 231 is driven by the write current, and the drive signals W_DL and W_BL are sequentially activated. In the clock cycle from time T21, when the writing is completed, the verification activation circuit 232 will verify again. The read activation signal VFREN is activated. The switching circuit 240 reads the activation signal VFREN in response to the second verification, the rain switches its connection path, and supplies the rewrite indication signal OWI output by the pulse generation circuit 235. To again The input request transmission circuit 242. In the write verification at the time of writing, when the write failure is detected, the verification result indication signal P/F is at the Η level. Therefore, the pulse wave generation circuit 235 will again be a single trigger pulse. The waveform form generates a rewrite instruction signal φ WI. At this time, the switching circuit 240 supplies the rewrite instruction signal OWI outputted by the pulse wave generation circuit 235 to the rewrite request transmission circuit 242. Circuit 242 will send a rewrite request WREQ based on the received rewrite indication signal φ xin WI. According to this rewrite request WREQ, the external processor or controller will again supply the write command with the same address AD0. Therefore, in the loop from the time Τ22, the same operation as the loop from the time T20 is executed again. When a write failure occurs internally, a write request is sent to the external processor or controller, whereby the external processor or controller can reliably detect the write status. In this way, it is possible to monitor the number of occurrences of write failures and the like, and take necessary measures. • Also, the re-write request WREQ can also be sent synchronously with the period of the last 63 319644 200830313 of the clock signal CLK. Further, the time T20 to the time T22 may be a clock cycle period of the external clock signal. [Modification]

第24圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態三的變形例 的自旋注入型MRAM的指令解碼器112及時序產生器 的構成圖。第24圖所示的指令解碼器112及時序產生哭 1U在,下的點中與第19圖所示的指令解碼器112及時: 產生器114的構成不同。亦即,在指令解碼器ιΐ2中,寫 入指令檢測電路2〇2的輸出信號會作為寫入模式指 令信號Φ w直接供給至寫入活性化電路2〇6。 曰 在時序產生器m中設置有再寫入要求發送電路 ’係根據來自脈波產生電路215的脈波信號(再寫入指 不信號)(DWI來發送再寫入要求WREQ。 曰 此%序產生n 114及指令解碼器112❸另—構成與第 门^所示的指令解碼器、112及時序產生器ιΐ4的構成相 冋’在對應的部分附上相同的參照符號並省略其詳細說明。 弟25圖係顯示第24圖所示的指令解 產生器m的資料寫入時的動作之時序圖。以下,參 25 ® K明第24 _圖所示的指令解碼器112及時序產生器 在從_ T3G P絲的循環中,與時脈信號€lk的上 同步地會供給寫人指令以作為指令CMD,同時會供认位 =號彻以作為位址信號AD。根據此寫入指令^入 /化%路206 t將寫入指示信f虎Write予以活性化。根 319644 64 200830313 -據寫入指示信號Write的活性化,寫入電流驅動活性化電 路211會將寫入數位線驅動信號WJ)L及寫入脈波信號 W_PULSE予以活性化。此時,用以禁止預讀的比較無效 化1吕號1 st—Write會活性化。 虽舄入動作結束時,接著,會藉由驗證活性化電路212 將,證讀出活性化信號VFREN活性化以執行寫入驗證。 當寫入不良時,如上述在帛18圖所示的時序圖中所說明, 來自脈波產生電路215的再寫入指示信號(内部寫入指示 信號)(DWI會活性化。根據再寫入指示信號的活性 化’再寫人要求發送電路25G會發送寫人要求微叫。 ,據寫入要求WREQ ’外部的處理器或控制器會再次 發送寫入指令苳相同的位址信號AD〇。如此,在從時刻叫 開始的循環中’會執行與從時刻T3〇開始的相同的寫入· 寫入驗證。 # ' 在從時刻T3i開始的再寫人的循環中,#正常地執行 馬入時,驗證結果Μ錢p/F會變成㈣性狀離,表 1正常地進行寫入。此情形下,由於脈波產生電路加 不會產生脈波信號’故再寫人要求發送電路说不 再寫入要求微EQ。因此,在從時刻τ ^广 能執行接下來的存取。 。的·衣中, 亚且,在第25圖所示的時序圖中,再寫入Fig. 24 is a view schematically showing the configuration of a command decoder 112 and a timing generator of a spin injection MRAM according to a modification of the third embodiment of the present invention. The instruction decoder 112 and the timing generation crying 1U shown in Fig. 24 are different from the instruction decoder 112 shown in Fig. 19 in the lower point: the configuration of the generator 114 is different. That is, in the command decoder ι2, the output signal of the write command detecting circuit 2〇2 is directly supplied to the write activating circuit 2〇6 as the write mode command signal Φ w .设置The re-write request transmitting circuit is provided in the timing generator m' based on the pulse wave signal from the pulse wave generating circuit 215 (rewriting the pointing signal) (DWI is used to transmit the rewriting request WREQ. The n 114 and the instruction decoder 112 are configured to be identical to the configuration of the instruction decoder, 112, and the timing generator ι 4 shown in the first step, and the same reference numerals are attached to the corresponding portions, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Fig. 25 is a timing chart showing the operation of writing the data of the command decoder m shown in Fig. 24. Hereinafter, the command decoder 112 and the timing generator shown in Fig. 24 are shown in FIG. _ T3G P wire loop, in synchronization with the clock signal €lk will supply the write command as the command CMD, and will be used for the acknowledgement = number as the address signal AD. According to this write command ^ / The %% road 206 t activates the write instruction letter f Tiger Write. Root 319644 64 200830313 - According to the activation of the write indication signal Write, the write current drive activation circuit 211 writes the digit line drive signal WJ) L and write pulse signal W_PULSE to live Of. At this time, the comparison for prohibiting the pre-reading is invalidated. 1 1st-Write is activated. At the end of the intrusion operation, the verification activation signal VFREN is activated by the verification activation circuit 212 to perform write verification. When the write is defective, as described above in the timing chart shown in FIG. 18, the rewrite instruction signal (internal write instruction signal) from the pulse wave generation circuit 215 (DWI is activated. According to the rewrite) The activation of the indication signal 'rewrites the request to the transmitting circuit 25G to send the writer to request the micro-call. According to the write request WREQ 'the external processor or controller will send the write command 苳 the same address signal AD〇 again. In this way, the same write/write verification as that from the time T3〇 is executed in the loop from the start of the call. # ' In the loop of the rewrite person from the time T3i, #normally executes the jump. , the verification result, the money p / F will become (four) traits away, Table 1 is normally written. In this case, because the pulse wave generating circuit does not generate a pulse wave signal, then the writer asks the sending circuit to say no longer write Into the request micro EQ. Therefore, the next access can be performed from the time τ ^. In the clothing, Ya, in the timing chart shown in Figure 25, rewrite

亦可與時脈信號CLK 士 … REQ ^ _ 的上升同步來發送。此情形下,怂0士 JT31開始的循環會變成等待循環(戮心叫。守 如上所述,依據本發明的實施形態三,於寫入不良時, 65 、 319644 200830313 ’發送再寫入要求俾使外部的指令發送表示寫入的寫入指 令。因此,外部的處理器或控制器能掌握資料寫入的狀態, '並能在寫入不良時執行必要的處置。 ' 並且,在實施形態三中,亦可與實施形態二相同倂用 忙碌/準備信號。 〔實施形態四〕 第26圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態四的MRAM 的整體構成圖。第26圖所示的MRAM可為雙態觸變 ⑩MRAM及自旋注入型MR AM的任一種。 在第26圖中,]^[尺人]\4的記憶體陣列20係分割成複數 個記憶體區塊ΜΒ0至MBn。在記憶體區塊ΜΒ0至MBn 的各者中,記憶體單元係排列成行列狀。對應MRAM的構 成,字線、數位線、位元線、以及源極線係對應各記憶體 單元行/列來配置。 對應記憶體區塊ΜΒ0至MBn的各者設置副寫入系電 善路SBW0至SBWn。這些副寫入系電路SBW0至SBWn的 各者係包含有數位線驅動器及位元線驅動器。當為自旋注 入型MRAM的情形時,復設置有源極線驅動器及源極線解 碼器。副寫入系電路SB W0至SB Wn係並列動作,且寫入 多位元資料。然而,如同後述詳細說明般,這些副寫入系 電路再寫入時的動作係可分別控制。 記憶體區塊ΜΒ0至MBn係分別對應來自外部的輸入 資料DI0至Din及副輸出資料DOO至DOn,並分別在對 應的資料輸出八連接墊之間進行資料的傳送接收。 66 319644 200830313 ^ 對應記憶體區塊MB0至MBn各者,復設置有讀出列 選擇電路RSKO至RSKn。如第14圖所示,讀出列選擇電 '路RSKO至RSKn係包含有針對對應的記憶體區塊的各位 "元線所設置的讀.出列選擇閘及讀出列選擇解碼器。於資料 讀出時(包含驗證動作)活性化,並根據未圖示的位址信 號,於對應的記憶體區塊中選擇對應所指定位址的列的位 元線。 對應這些讀出列選擇電路RSKO至RSKn各者,設置 ⑩有感測放大器電路SAKO至SAKn。這些感測放大器電路 SAKO至SAKn係響應來自對應的感測控制電路SCKO至 SCKn的感測活性化信號ENO至ENn的活性化而被活性 化,並且將驗證基準電壓VREFR與從對應的讀出列選擇 電路RSKO至RSKn所讀出的資料進行比較。 這些感測放大器電路SAK0至8入尺11的輸出信號係輸 出至分別對應設置的輪出資料閂鎖器QDL0至QDLn。It can also be transmitted in synchronization with the rise of the clock signal CLK ... REQ ^ _. In this case, the loop started by the JT31 will become a waiting loop. (As stated above, according to the third embodiment of the present invention, when the write is bad, 65, 319644 200830313 'send rewrite request俾The external command is sent to the write command indicating the write. Therefore, the external processor or controller can grasp the state of the data write, and can perform the necessary processing when the write is bad. In the same manner as in the second embodiment, the busy/preparation signal can be used. [Embodiment 4] Fig. 26 is a view schematically showing an overall configuration of an MRAM according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The MRAM shown in Fig. 26 can be Any of the two-state thixotropic 10MRAM and the spin injection type MR AM. In Fig. 26, the memory array 20 of the ^[footer]\4 is divided into a plurality of memory blocks ΜΒ0 to MBn. In each of the body blocks ΜΒ0 to MBn, the memory cells are arranged in a matrix. The structure of the MRAM, the word line, the digit line, the bit line, and the source line are arranged corresponding to each memory cell row/column. Corresponding memory block ΜΒ0 Each of the MBn sets the sub-writing system electric circuits SBW0 to SBWn. Each of the sub-writing system circuits SBW0 to SBWn includes a digit line driver and a bit line driver. When it is a spin injection type MRAM The source line driver and the source line decoder are repeatedly provided. The sub-write system circuits SB W0 to SB Wn operate in parallel and write multi-bit data. However, as described in detail later, these sub-write systems are The operation of the circuit re-writing can be separately controlled. The memory blocks ΜΒ0 to MBn correspond to the external input data DI0 to Din and the sub-output data DOO to DOn, respectively, and are respectively output between the corresponding data output eight connection pads. Data transmission and reception are performed. 66 319644 200830313 ^ Each of the memory blocks MB0 to MBn is provided with readout column selection circuits RSKO to RSKn. As shown in Fig. 14, the readout column selection circuit 'RSKO to RSKn The system includes a read/exit selection gate and a read column selection decoder set for each bit of the corresponding memory block. The data is activated (including the verification action) and is activated according to the figure. Address letter A bit line corresponding to the column of the specified address is selected in the corresponding memory block. Corresponding to each of the read column selection circuits RSKO to RSKn, 10 sense amplifier circuits SAKO to SAKn are provided. These sense amplifiers The circuits SAKO to SAKn are activated in response to activation of the sensing activation signals EEO to ENn from the corresponding sensing control circuits SCKO to SCKn, and verify the reference voltage VREFR from the corresponding readout column selection circuit RSKO to The data read by RSKn is compared. The output signals of these sense amplifier circuits SAK0 to 8 are input to the correspondingly arranged wheel data latches QDL0 to QDLn.

• 對應輸出資料栓鎖器QDL0至QDLn各者,設置有比 較器COMO至COMn。在一般的資料讀出時,輸出資料閂 鎖器QDL0至QDLn會經由連接墊來產生外部讀出資料 DOO至Don,在驗證動作時(内部讀出時),輸出資料閂 鎖器QDL0至QDLn會將閂鎖資料供給至對應的比較器 COMO至0:〇]\111。比較器(:〇]^0至(:〇]^11會將分另4對應設 置的輸入資料問鎖器DDL0至001^的閂鎖資料與來自輸 出資料閂鎖器QDL0至QDLn的資料進行比較,並產生表 •示其比較結果的信號P/F0至P/平η。這些比較器COMO 67 319644 200830313 。至COMn係與實施形態一至三所示的構成相同,對應雙態 觸變MRAM及自旋注入型]^尺人]^來設定其構成。 來自這些比較益COMO至COMn的驗證結果指示信號 P/F0至P/Fn係Μ由各自對應的感測控制電路至 SCKn供給,且供給至副寫入系電路SBW〇至SBWn。如此, 於每個記憶體區塊中,會根據驗證結果而選擇性地分別執 行再寫入。 比較器COMO至COMn的輪出信號復供給至〇R電鞋 304。〇!1電路304係產生主驗證結果指示信號Mp/F並胡 給至時序產生器302。 時序產生器302係根據來自指令解碼器3〇〇的寫入相 示而產生數位線驅動信號W_DL、驗證讀出活性化信號• For each of the output data latches QDL0 to QDLn, comparators COM0 to COMn are set. When the general data is read, the output data latches QDL0 to QDLn generate the external read data DOO to Don via the connection pad. During the verify operation (internal readout), the output data latches QDL0 to QDLn will The latch data is supplied to the corresponding comparator COMO to 0: 〇]\111. The comparator (:〇)^0 to (:〇]^11 compares the latch data of the input data request locks DDL0 to 001^ set by the other 4 with the data from the output data latches QDL0 to QDLn. And generate a signal indicating the comparison result P/F0 to P/flat η. These comparators COMO 67 319644 200830313. The COMn system is the same as the one shown in Embodiments 1 to 3, corresponding to the two-state thixotropic MRAM and The spin-injection type is used to set the configuration. The verification result indication signals P/F0 to P/Fn from the comparisons COMO to COMn are supplied from the respective sensing control circuits to SCKn, and supplied to The sub-write system circuits SBW〇 to SBWn. Thus, in each memory block, re-writing is selectively performed separately according to the verification result. The turn-out signals of the comparators COM0 to COMn are re-supplied to the R-electricity The shoe 304. The circuit 101 generates a main verification result indication signal Mp/F and sends it to the timing generator 302. The timing generator 302 generates a digital line driver based on the write phase indication from the instruction decoder 3A. Signal W_DL, verify readout activation signal

^BL 开":一Γ作為時序產生器302的構成’能使用實 施形—或二所示的構成。 .解碼器300會與時脈信號CLK同 部的指令CMD,並在接收到耷入j匕-士 本目外 w .f〜 舄W時產生寓人指示信聲 二1收到讀出指示時,指令解喝器3〇〇會產生讀出 =二ead。來自指令解碼器及時序產生器3 ^虎會供給至感測控制電路S⑽至SCKn及副寫Λ 系電路SBW0至SBWn 〇 j曰 霞了收士 ’ 介介斟〜 亚且,爲了將讀出動作予以活括 匕’出列選擇電路RSK。至咖以給驗證讀出活 性化仏5虎VFREN及讀出指示信號Read。 此外’第26圖中雖未顯示.,·.但設置有位址_器, 319644 68 200830313 -記憶體區塊各者中產生用以指定位址的内部位址信號 (ADD)。 • 感測放大器電路S ΑΚ0至S ΑΚη係分別對應記憶體區 ’塊ΜΒ0至ΜΒη而設置,用以指定選擇列的位址信號係未 供給至用以將感測放大器予以活性化的感測控制電路 SCK0至SCKn。亦即,感測放大器電路SAK0至SAKn係 針對對應的記憶體區塊來共通設置。感測控制電路SCK0 至SCKn係分別在對應的驗證結果指示信號P/F0至P/ • Fn的結果表示為不一致時,根據驗證讀出活性化信號 VFREN來將對應的感測放大器電路S ΑΚ0至S ΑΚη予以活 性化。 在第26圖所示的MRAM的構成中,當資料寫入時, 來自外部的輸入資料DI0至0111會並列地寫入至記憶體區 塊ΜΒ0至]\〇11的選擇記憶體單元。在驗證動作時,藉由 感測控制電路SCK0至8(:1^11,感測放大器電路8八1^至 着SAKn會被活性化,並藉由比較器COMO至COMn並列地 進行比較動作。 於再寫入時,根據驗證結果指示信號P/F0至P/ Fn,僅針對產生寫入不良的記憶體區塊進行再寫入。雖會 針對其餘之已正常進行寫入的記憶體單元區塊供給寫入指 不7虎Write ’但對應的副舄入糸電路會猎由驗證結果指 示信號而變成除能(disable )狀態,故不會進行資料的再 寫入。 ·- •第27圖係顯示第26圖所示的MRAM的資料寫入時的 69 319644 200830313 •動作之流程圖。以下,參照第.27圖,說明第26圖所示的 MRAM的寫入順序。 ‘ 首先,指令解碼器300會藉由來自外部的指令CMD •來判斷已被指定寫入(步驟S21 )。直至接收寫入指令為 止,會監控來自外部的指令,等待接收寫入指令。 當接收到寫入指令且被游示寫入時,首先,藉由指令 解碼器300及時序產生器302來進行預讀(步驟S22)。 於記憶體區塊ΜΒ0至1^〇11各者中,並列地讀出寫入對象 ⑩的記憶體單元的記憶資料θ如此,於比較器COMO至COMn 中,會判斷從輸入資料閂鎖器DDL0至DDLn所接收的寫 入資料DI0至Din與對應的内部讀出資料的邏輯值為一致 或不一致(步驟S23 )。 、 根據來自OR電路304的主驗證結果指示信號]\0>/丨 為Η位準或L位準,針對寫入資料的所有位元進行判斷記 憶資料與寫入資料是否一致。當主驗證結果指示信號ΜΡ 馨/F為Η位準,且至少針對一位元的記憶體單元顯示記憶 資料與寫入資料為不一致時,會再次根據來自時序產生器 302及指令解碼器300的控制信號來進行資料的寫入(步 驟S24 )。此時,根據來自比較器COMO至COMn的驗證 結果指示信號P/F0至P/Fn,僅針對需寫入的記憶體區 塊執行育料的寫入。無須寫入的記憶體區塊會維持在待機 狀態(步驟S24) 〇 接著,執行驗證讀出(步驟S25)。感測放大器電路 …SAK0.至SAKn會根據驗證绪果指示信號P/F0.至P/Fn 70 319644 200830313 -而選擇性地活性化,僅針對需寫入而已進行寫入的記憶體 區塊進行感測動作,並進行驗證讀出。 ‘ 對於待機狀態時的記憶體區塊,對應的輸出資料閃鎖 •器QDL0至QDLn為閂鎖狀態,對應的比較器COMi所輸 出的驗證結果指示信號P/Fi的邏輯位準不會變化。 接著,根據來自OR電路304的主驗證結果指示信號 MP/F是否為Η位準來判斷全部的位元是否已結束寫入 (步驟S26)。當全部的位寫已結束寫入時,資料的寫入 _結束。另一方面,當至少一位元的記憶體單元存在寫入不 良時,會再次重複從步驟S24開始的動作。如此,於記憶 體區塊ΜΒ0至ΜΒη中,直至寫入正常地結束為止,會重 .複執行再寫入,而寫入已結束的記憶體區塊會維持在待機 狀態。 此外,於自旋注入型MR AM中,亦可省略用以進行預 讀的步驟S22及步驟S23。此情形中,於寫入時會執行步 參驟S24至步驟S26的動作。 第28圖係概略地顯示第26圖所示之副寫入系電路 SB W0至SB Wn所包含的位元線解碼控制電路及數位線解 碼電路的構成圖。於第28圖中,係代表性地顯示副寫入系 電路SBWi的位元線解碼控制電路376i及數位線解碼電路 3701 〇 於第28圖中,位元線解碼控制電路376i係包含有: AND閘G3i,係接收寫入位元線驅動信號WJ3L、寫入指 一 示信號Write、以及驗證結果指示信號Ρ/Fi ;以及感測控 71 319644 200830313 •制電路SCKi,係根據驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN、讀出 指示信號Read、以及驗證結果指示信號P/Fi來產生感測 •活性化信號ENi。 * AND閘G3i係對應第16圖及第11圖所示的AND閘 G3 〇 感測控制電路SCKi係包含有:AND閘380,係接收 驗證結果指示信號P/Fi與驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN ; 以及OR閘OGli,係接收AND閘380的輸出信號與讀出 _指示信號Read以產生感測活性化信號ENi。OR閘OGli 係對應第11圖及第16圖所示的OR閘OG1。 數位線解碼電路370i係接收寫入數位線驅動信號-W—DL、寫入指示信號Write、以及又位址信號又人00,並 供給輸出信號至下一段的數位線驅動電路72。此數位線解 碼電路370i的構成係與第11圖及第16圖所示的數位線解 碼電路的構成相同,故未顯示其詳細構成。 φ 如第28圖所示,將驗證結果指示信號P/Fi供給至對 應的位元線解碼控制電路376i及數位線解碼電路370i,藉 此能根據驗證結果對各個記憶體區塊設定副寫入系電路 SB Wi的寫入之活性化/非活性化。 此外,在自旋注入型MRAM的情形中,係供給寫入脈 波信號WJPULSE以代替寫入位元線驅動信號W—BL。 下一段的位元線解碼電路72及數位線驅動電路· 72的 構成係與第11圖或第16圖所示的構成相同。 當至少驗證結果指示信號P/Fi為L位準而表示♦無須 72 319644 200830313 -寫入時,AND閘G3i及380的輸出信號會變成L位準。讀 出指示信號Read係於資料寫入時為L位準。因此,下一 ’段的位元線解碼電路74係維持於非活性狀態(除能狀 '態),而不進行位元線選擇。此外,感測活性化信號ENi 亦為非活性狀態,故不進行感測動作。 第29圖係顯示當實施形態四的MRAM為自旋注入型 MRAM時的源極線解碼控制電路380的構成。第29圖所 示的源極線解碼控制電路380係對應第16圖所示的源極線 _解碼控制電路120的構成。在第29圖的構成中,亦代表性 地顯不副寫入糸電路SB Wi中的電路。 在第29圖中,源極線解碼控制電路380係包含有:反 *相器IV4i,係將輸入資料予以反轉;以及AND閘G8i,係 接收反相器IV4i的輸出信號與驗證結果指示信號P/Fi。 這些反相器IV4i及AND閘G8i係對應第16圖所示的解碼 控制電路120的反相器IV4及AND閘G8。 φ 源極線解碼控制電路380復包含有:AND閘382,係 接收驗證結果指示信號P/Fi與驗證讀出活性化信號 VFREN ;以及OR閘OG3i,係接收AND閘382的輸出入 信與讀出指示信號Read。OR閘OG3i係對應第16圖所示 的源極線解碼控制電路120所包含的OR閘OG3。藉由AND 閘382,根據驗證結果指示信號P/Fi選擇性地將驗證讀 出活性化信號VFREN設定成有效/無效狀態。 源極線解碼控制電路380復包含有:AND閘G9i,係 接收寫入脈波信號W_PULSE、AND閘Gh的輸出Μ言號、〜 73 319644 200830313 ^以及寫入活性化信號Write ;以及OR閘OG4i,係接收OR 閘G9i的輸出信號與OR閘OG3 i的輸出信號,並將其輸 _出信號供給至下一段的源極線解碼器。AND閘G9i係對應 ’第16圖所示的源極線解碼控制電路120所包含的AND閘 G9。OR閘OG4i係對應第16圖所示的源極線解碼控制電 路120所包含的OR閘OG4。源極線解碼器的構成係與第 16圖所示的源極線解碼器122的構成相同。 在第29圖所示的源極線解碼控制電路380的構成中, •當驗證結果指示信號P/Fi為L位準時,AND閘G8i及 382的輸出信號會變成L位準。於寫入模式時,讀出指示 信號Read為非活性狀態的L位準。因此,L位準的信號會 從OR閘OGi供給至下一段的源極線解碼器(122),故 源極線解碼器會維持於除能狀態。 將來自對應記憶體區塊各者所設置的比較器COM0至 COMn之驗證結果指示信號P/F0至1>/^11供給至各自對 馨應的副寫入系電路SBW0至SBWn以及感測控制電路 SCK0至SCKn,藉此能個別控制再寫入至記憶體區塊ΜΒ0 至 MBn 〇 於再寫入時,係可全部以相同的條件來進行再寫入, 亦可如後述之說明變更其寫入條件。在多位元資料的寫入 時,僅對需寫入的記憶體單元進行寫入,而對於已正常進 行寫入的位元(記憶體單元)則能停止對於無須寫入的記 憶體單元之寫入,故能降低消耗電流。 如上所述‘,·依據本發明的實施形態四,係構成為以記- 74 319644 200830313 憶體區塊為單位來進行再寫入,故能 料。此外,由於在已結束寫人的記憶體資 入’而能 動作而維持於待機狀態,故不會進必要 订舄入 降低消耗電力。 要的馬 〔實施形態五〕 第30圖係概略性地顯示 MRA1U的私人# 承發明的貫施形態五的 MRAM的才日令解碼器4〇〇的構成圖。在 人 解碼器400係包含有.寫入沪人 圖中,指々 μ 有.舄私令檢測電路402,係盥時脈 同步地檢測是否從來自外部的指令cmd。收 =二:及_路404,係根據來自寫入指令檢 列包路402的寫入指令檢測作铗巾 你^ 士 n欢凋1°#uCI)WF來設定初始值,並 與内部時脈信號CLKi同步地進行 共人a上 1 丁畔数動作。當根據寫入 曰^測McDWF將計數電路4〇4的計數值設定成初始 值…計數電路404會與内部時脈信號CLKi的上下 :同步地進輯數動作,衫料預定料,計數電路4〇4 會停止計數動作。 指令解碼器400復包含有:脈波產生電路4〇6,係在 來自計數電路彻的計數遞增指示信號為非活性狀態時, 與内部時脈信號CLKi同步地產生單觸發脈波信號;以及 R電路408 ’係根據舄入指令檢測信號①WF與來自脈波 產生電路4 0 6的脈波信號來產生寫入指示信號φ w。 ' 當計數電路404的計數值到達預定值而將計數遞增信 號ΦΙΠΜ舌性化時,脈波產生電路概會停止脈波產^動 作。因此,脈波產生電路406會根據計數電路4〇4預先設 319644 75 200830313 定的預定計數值的次數來產生脈 .根據採用指令解碼器 電路權的寫入指示信號㈣會供給至下入 化電路或供給至時序產生器。因此 ,入活性 適用於第22圖所示用以取、w 伽係能 外之嫩趟。 ^再以要求至外部的構成以 第31圖係顯示第30圖所示的指令解碼器彻 之流程圖。以下,參昭第3 ^ 约動作 ,解碼器_的動作Γ ®,/兄明第3〇圖所示的指令 令檢測電路術係與時脈信號CL 來自外部的指令CMD,並等 孤技 當來自外部的指令CMD為以不(步驟請)。 路402會將寫入檢測作 曰…舄入指令檢測電 w…a 號0WR予以活性化。接著,畔數 電路404會被初始化並開 按者彳數 踗4M予本h 動作。此時’脈波產生電 波信號。另—方面,⑽電路彻會^ Γ4〇 ^ )。根據舄人指示信號㈣,會在 的 及寫入後的驗證動作,且根據驗證結果,驗::=二 號P/F (或P/Fi)备分 皸-且、、、σ果扣不k 準(㈣_。在㈣驗證結果的邏輯位 情形時,合在g h 中*為雙態觸變MRAM的 在弟一次的寫入時執 入時不會執行預讀(參照第19圖)。 的再馬 ,數Hr計數電路404的計數值未到達預定值,故 梢遞增切⑽P為非活性化狀態(步驟如)。因此, 319644 76 200830313 同牛i產生產生電路4G6會細料脈信號CLU = 波信號’並再次發送寫入指示信號 值到達預+ /士’在㈣S43中’當計數電路綱的計數 能史s才曰不^號Φυρ會變成活性肤 悲,脈波產生電路406會停止夕你从/ 狀 了止之後的脈波產生動作。 中g心利用第30圖所示的指令解碼器400的情米 中,即使在内部中已正常地 月形 千if拙—含 仃寫入日守,亦會發送寫入指^BL ON ": As a configuration of the timing generator 302, the configuration shown in the embodiment or the second can be used. The decoder 300 will be in the same command CMD as the clock signal CLK, and when receiving the input j匕-士本目 w.f~ 舄W, when the person indicating the letter 2 is received, the read instruction is received. The instruction to dissipate 3 〇〇 will produce read = two ead. From the instruction decoder and timing generator 3, the tiger will supply the sensing control circuit S(10) to SCKn and the sub-writing system SBW0 to SBWn 〇j 曰 了 收 收 ' ' 斟 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚 亚Let's live out the 'out of the selection circuit RSK. To the coffee, the verification read-activated 仏5 tiger VFREN and the read instruction signal Read. In addition, although not shown in Fig. 26, there is an address_er, 319644 68 200830313 - an internal address signal (ADD) for specifying an address is generated in each of the memory blocks. • The sense amplifier circuits S ΑΚ0 to S ΑΚ η are respectively provided corresponding to the memory regions 'blocks ΜΒ0 to ΜΒη, to specify that the address signals of the selected columns are not supplied to the sensing control for activating the sense amplifiers. Circuits SCK0 to SCKn. That is, the sense amplifier circuits SAK0 to SAKn are commonly set for the corresponding memory block. The sensing control circuits SCK0 to SCKn respectively detect the corresponding sense amplifier circuit S ΑΚ0 according to the verification readout activation signal VFREN when the results of the corresponding verification result indication signals P/F0 to P/ • Fn are expressed as inconsistent S ΑΚη is activated. In the configuration of the MRAM shown in Fig. 26, when data is written, input data DI0 to 0111 from the outside are written in parallel to the selected memory cells of the memory blocks ΜΒ0 to 〇11. At the time of the verification operation, by the sensing control circuits SCK0 to 8 (:1^11, the sense amplifier circuit 8 is activated to SAKn, and the comparison operation is performed in parallel by the comparators COM0 to COMn. At the time of rewriting, according to the verification result instruction signals P/F0 to P/Fn, only the memory block in which the write failure is generated is rewritten, although the remaining memory cell regions that have been normally written are written. The block supply write refers to the 7 Tiger Write 'but the corresponding sub-input circuit will be hunted by the verification result indication signal and become the disable state, so the data will not be rewritten. ·- • Figure 27 The data of the MRAM data shown in Fig. 26 is displayed. 69 319644 200830313 • Flow chart of the operation. Hereinafter, the writing sequence of the MRAM shown in Fig. 26 will be described with reference to Fig. 27. 'First, instruction decoding The device 300 judges that the write has been designated by the external command CMD (step S21). Until the write command is received, the external command is monitored and the write command is received. When the write command is received and When being written by the cursor, first of all, by The instruction decoder 300 and the timing generator 302 perform pre-reading (step S22). In each of the memory blocks ΜΒ0 to 1〇11, the memory data θ of the memory unit of the write target 10 is read in parallel. In the comparators COM0 to COMn, it is judged that the logical values of the write data DI0 to Din received from the input data latches DDL0 to DDLn and the corresponding internal read data are identical or inconsistent (step S23). The main verification result indication signal from the OR circuit 304]\0>/丨 is the Η level or the L level, and it is determined whether all the bits of the written data are consistent with the written data. When the main verification result indicates the signal If the memory unit and the write data are inconsistent for at least one bit of the memory unit, the data is again generated based on the control signals from the timing generator 302 and the instruction decoder 300. Writing (step S24). At this time, based on the verification result instruction signals P/F0 to P/Fn from the comparators COM0 to COMn, the writing of the nurturing is performed only for the memory block to be written. Memory area The block will remain in the standby state (step S24). Next, the verification readout is performed (step S25). The sense amplifier circuits ... SAK0. to SAKn will be in accordance with the verification result indication signal P/F0. to P/Fn 70 319644 200830313 - Selectively activated, the sensing operation is performed only for the memory block that has been written and written, and the verification is read out. 'For the memory block in the standby state, the corresponding output data is flashed. The QDL0 to QDLn are in a latched state, and the logic level of the verification result indicating signal P/Fi output by the corresponding comparator COMi does not change. Next, it is judged whether or not all of the bits have been written based on whether or not the main verification result indicating signal MP/F from the OR circuit 304 is the level (step S26). When all the bit writes have been written, the data is written to _. On the other hand, when there is a write failure in at least one bit of the memory cell, the action from step S24 is repeated again. Thus, in the memory blocks ΜΒ0 to ΜΒη, until the writing ends normally, the rewriting is repeated, and the memory block whose writing has ended is maintained in the standby state. Further, in the spin injection type MR AM, step S22 and step S23 for performing the pre-reading may be omitted. In this case, the operations of steps S24 to S26 are performed at the time of writing. Fig. 28 is a view schematically showing the configuration of a bit line decoding control circuit and a bit line decoding circuit included in the sub-writing system circuits SB W0 to SB Wn shown in Fig. 26. In Fig. 28, the bit line decoding control circuit 376i and the digit line decoding circuit 3701 of the sub writing system circuit SBWi are representatively shown. In Fig. 28, the bit line decoding control circuit 376i includes: AND The gate G3i receives the write bit line drive signal WJ3L, the write finger display signal Write, and the verification result indication signal Ρ/Fi; and the sense control 71 319644 200830313 • the circuit SCKi, which reads the activation signal according to the verification The VFREN, the readout instruction signal Read, and the verification result indication signal P/Fi are generated to generate the sensing/activation signal ENi. * AND gate G3i corresponds to the AND gate G3 shown in Fig. 16 and Fig. 11 〇 The sensing control circuit SCKi includes: AND gate 380, which receives the verification result indication signal P/Fi and verifies the read activation signal VFREN And the OR gate OGli receives the output signal of the AND gate 380 and the read_indication signal Read to generate the sensing activation signal ENi. The OR gate OGli corresponds to the OR gate OG1 shown in Figs. 11 and 16. The digit line decoding circuit 370i receives the write digit line drive signal -W_DL, the write indication signal Write, and the address signal 00, and supplies the output signal to the digit line drive circuit 72 of the next stage. The configuration of the digit line decoding circuit 370i is the same as that of the digit line decoding circuit shown in Figs. 11 and 16, and the detailed configuration thereof is not shown. φ As shown in Fig. 28, the verification result instruction signal P/Fi is supplied to the corresponding bit line decoding control circuit 376i and the digit line decoding circuit 370i, whereby sub-writing can be set for each memory block according to the verification result. The activation/deactivation of the writing of the circuit SB Wi. Further, in the case of the spin injection type MRAM, the write pulse signal WJPULSE is supplied instead of the write bit line drive signal W_BL. The configuration of the bit line decoding circuit 72 and the digit line driving circuit 72 in the next stage is the same as that shown in Fig. 11 or Fig. 16. When at least the verification result indicating signal P/Fi is at the L level, it is indicated that ♦ no need to be 72 319644 200830313 - writing, the output signals of the AND gates G3i and 380 will become the L level. The read instruction signal Read is at the L level when the data is written. Therefore, the bit line decoding circuit 74 of the next segment is maintained in an inactive state (disengaged state) without bit line selection. Further, the sensing activation signal ENi is also in an inactive state, so no sensing action is performed. Fig. 29 is a view showing the configuration of the source line decoding control circuit 380 when the MRAM of the fourth embodiment is a spin injection type MRAM. The source line decoding control circuit 380 shown in Fig. 29 corresponds to the configuration of the source line_decoding control circuit 120 shown in Fig. 16. In the configuration of Fig. 29, the circuit in the SB circuit SB Wi is also representatively displayed. In Fig. 29, the source line decoding control circuit 380 includes: an inverse phase comparator IV4i for inverting input data; and an AND gate G8i for receiving an output signal of the inverter IV4i and a verification result indicating signal. P/Fi. These inverters IV4i and AND gates G8i correspond to the inverter IV4 and the AND gate G8 of the decoding control circuit 120 shown in Fig. 16. The φ source line decoding control circuit 380 includes: an AND gate 382 for receiving the verification result indication signal P/Fi and the verification read activation signal VFREN; and an OR gate OG3i for receiving the input and output of the AND gate 382 Indicates the signal Read. The OR gate OG3i corresponds to the OR gate OG3 included in the source line decoding control circuit 120 shown in Fig. 16. By the AND gate 382, the verification read activation signal VFREN is selectively set to the active/inactive state based on the verification result instruction signal P/Fi. The source line decoding control circuit 380 includes: an AND gate G9i, which receives the write pulse signal W_PULSE, an output gate number of the AND gate Gh, ~ 73 319644 200830313 ^, and a write activation signal Write; and an OR gate OG4i The output signal of the OR gate G9i and the output signal of the OR gate OG3 i are received, and the output signal is supplied to the source line decoder of the next segment. The AND gate G9i corresponds to the AND gate G9 included in the source line decoding control circuit 120 shown in Fig. 16. The OR gate OG4i corresponds to the OR gate OG4 included in the source line decoding control circuit 120 shown in Fig. 16. The configuration of the source line decoder is the same as that of the source line decoder 122 shown in Fig. 16. In the configuration of the source line decoding control circuit 380 shown in Fig. 29, when the verification result indicating signal P/Fi is at the L level, the output signals of the AND gates G8i and 382 become the L level. In the write mode, the L level in which the instruction signal Read is in an inactive state is read. Therefore, the L level signal is supplied from the OR gate OGi to the source line decoder (122) of the next stage, so the source line decoder is maintained in the disabled state. The verification result indication signals P/F0 to 1>/^11 from the comparators COM0 to COMn provided by the respective memory blocks are supplied to the respective sub-write system circuits SBW0 to SBWn and the sensing control The circuits SCK0 to SCKn can be individually controlled to be rewritten to the memory blocks ΜΒ0 to MBn. When rewriting, all of the circuits can be rewritten under the same conditions, or the writing can be changed as described later. Into the conditions. When writing multi-bit data, only the memory cells to be written are written, and for the cells (memory cells) that have been normally written, the memory cells that are not required to be written can be stopped. Write, so it can reduce the current consumption. As described above, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, it is configured to perform rewriting in units of the memory block of 74 319644 200830313, which is preferable. In addition, since it can be operated and maintained in the standby state after the memory of the writer has been completed, the power consumption is not reduced. The horse to be exemplified [Embodiment 5] Fig. 30 is a view schematically showing the configuration of the MRAM's private decoder of the MRAM of the MRA1U. In the human decoder 400, there is included a write-in person, and the fingerprint 检测 有 舄 令 令 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 402 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 Receive = 2: and _ way 404, according to the write command from the write command check packet 402 detection, you can set the initial value and internal clock with the wiper 1 ̄#uCI)WF The signal CLKi synchronously performs a 1-dip number operation on the common person a. When the count value of the counting circuit 4〇4 is set to the initial value according to the write buffer McDWF, the counting circuit 404 will operate in synchronization with the upper and lower sides of the internal clock signal CLKi: the predetermined amount of material, the counting circuit 4 〇4 will stop counting. The instruction decoder 400 further includes: a pulse wave generating circuit 4〇6, which generates a one-shot pulse wave signal in synchronization with the internal clock signal CLKi when the count increment indicating signal from the counting circuit is in an inactive state; and R The circuit 408' generates the write instructing signal φw based on the intrusion command detection signal 1WF and the pulse wave signal from the pulse wave generating circuit 406. When the count value of the counting circuit 404 reaches a predetermined value and the count up signal Φ is tongue-shaped, the pulse wave generating circuit stops the pulse wave generating operation. Therefore, the pulse wave generating circuit 406 generates a pulse according to the number of times the predetermined counting value is set by the counting circuit 4〇4 in advance. The writing instruction signal (4) according to the instruction decoder circuit weight is supplied to the downstream circuit. Or supplied to the timing generator. Therefore, the activity is applied to the tenderness shown in Fig. 22 for taking and g gamma. Further, the configuration of the request to the outside is shown in Fig. 31 as a flowchart showing the instruction decoder shown in Fig. 30. In the following, the third action of the reference, the action of the decoder _, and the instruction shown in the figure 3 of the brothers make the detection circuit system and the clock signal CL come from the external command CMD, and wait for the orphan. The instruction CMD from the outside is not (step please). The path 402 activates the write detection as 舄...intrusion command detection power w...a number 0WR. Next, the number of circuits 404 is initialized and the number of turns is 踗4M to the h action. At this time, the pulse wave generates a signal. On the other hand, (10) the circuit will be ^ Γ 4 〇 ^ ). According to the deaf person indication signal (4), the verification action will be in and after the writing, and according to the verification result, the test::= P/F (or P/Fi) backup point 皲-and, 、, σ fruit deduction k 准 ((4) _. In the case of the logical position of the (4) verification result, the read-in is not performed when the gh is *the binary haptic MRAM is written by the younger one (see Figure 19). Further, the count value of the number Hr counter circuit 404 does not reach the predetermined value, so the tip incremental cut (10) P is inactivated state (step is as follows). Therefore, the 319644 76 200830313 will generate the pulse signal CLU = The wave signal 'and re-sends the write indication signal value to the pre-+/s' in (4) S43. 'When the count circuit can count the history, the number Φυρ will become active, and the pulse generation circuit 406 will stop. You generate an action from the pulse wave after the singularity. The g-heart uses the command decoder 400 shown in Figure 30, even if it is normal in the interior. Shou, will also send a write finger

’、、’仃舄入順序。在此情形中,當驗欲έ士罢i匕-俨占 /F或p/Fi顯示為正常寫入時,:=:國曰,P 體早兀執行賢料寫入。 — 1 在第,圖,所示的指令解=了, 耷入扣人u 士人 %馬為的情形中,當從外部接收 “ 部執行預定次數的寫入及寫入驗證。 在找電路_料定的狀值表㈣預定 的卢理料的寫入。此外,“ 的處理器或控制器係於寫入指人八 卜邛 保證結束寫入,故系統設計==在預定期間内 時間設定成預定值之故)侍合易(此因可將寫入存取 如上所述’依據本發明的實能+ 指令時,能在_于預定 的眘祖官 疋-人數的舄入及驗證並進行正確 、〜入’且能將寫入存取時間設定成預定值。 内部時脈信號CLKi係可為盥氺A从* CLK相同的睥胱严啼.了為/、采自外部的時脈信號 以分頻切料料脈錢⑴C予 刀頻而產生的内部時脈信號。只 卞 内部的資料寫入及驗證循環^ 保證規定 勺,月間之週期的内部時脈信號 319644 77 200830313 •即可。 〔實施形態六〕 . 第32圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態六的MRam',, 'Intrusion order. In this case, when the inquiring gentleman strikes 匕 俨 俨 / / F or p / Fi is displayed as normal writing, :=: Guo 曰, P body early 兀 贤 写入 。 。 。 。 。 — 1 In the case of the figure, the instruction shown in the figure =, in the case of the intrusion of the person, the "received from the outside", the execution of the write and write verification of the predetermined number of times. The predetermined value table (4) the writing of the predetermined Luli material. In addition, the "processor or controller is written to the person who guarantees the end of writing, so the system design == the time is set to within the predetermined period. For the predetermined value, Shihe Yi (this can be written and accessed as described above. 'According to the real power + command according to the present invention, it can be carried out and verified in the predetermined cautious ancestor-number of people. Correct, ~in' and can set the write access time to a predetermined value. The internal clock signal CLKi can be the same as 盥氺A from * CLK 啼 啼 了 了 了 了 了 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 Internal clock signal generated by dividing the material (1) C to the cutting frequency. Only the internal data is written and verified. ^ Guarantee the specified scoop, the internal clock signal of the period of the month 319644 77 200830313 • Yes. [Embodiment 6] Fig. 32 is a view schematically showing the sixth embodiment of the present invention MRam

的時序產生器3G2的主要部分的構成圖。在第32圖所示的 構成中,於時序產生器3〇2内設置有忙碌信號產生電路 4!0’該忙碌信號產生電路4〗〇係根據來自〇r電路3料的 ^驗證結果指示信號Mp/F來產纽"準備信號V 八立在帛32圖所示的構成中,直至内部結束多位元資料的 王口P位το的寫入為止,忙碌/準備信號B/rz會被$ 忙碌狀態。因此’外部的處理器或控制器能碟^地ς測出 =貫地寫人多位元資料的全部位元的期間。在此寫 根據忙n準備錢B/RZ,外 器會變成特狀態。 & 制 =2圖所示的時序產生器的構成係與包含有第圖 Γί:號產生電路233之時序產生器的構成相同。 結果指示信號p/F。 末代替一位兀的驗證 —如上所述,依據本發明的實施形態五,在内部反覆執 行舄入的期間,外部會發送忙 每砧,t 彔/準備仏號。因此,能確 二Π結束資料寫入的時間點’並能迴避存取的衝突 而只現正確的資料寫入。 〔實施形態七〕 …1 33圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態七的時序產 319644 78 200830313 生器搬的主要部分的構成圖。在第33圖所 •器3〇2巾,根據主驗證結果指示信號Mp/ CLK,會發送再寫人要求職EQ至外部。因此,== 在有寫入不良的位元之期間’會反覆地發送再寫韦 WREQ。在内部中,對於已結束寫入 ’ 的驗證結果指示信號P/Fi而停二會根據對應 止二所示的構成的情形中’直至結束資料寫入為 ^外行確貫地反覆發送寫人指令,故能實現正確地資 料馬入。此外,處理器或控制器亦可構成為 再入 要求觀Q來監控“狀況,並在純咖定次數的:寫 = ;WREQ時判斷對應的位元為不良並執行必要的錯 並且’再寫入要求發送電路412係與時脈信號⑽(亦 可為内部時脈信號)同步地產生再寫人要求wreq。然而, 亦可如第22圖所示’根據驗證讀出活性化信號vf麵與 主驗證結果指示信號MP/F,以不與時脈信號CM同步 的方式來發送再寫入要求WREQ。 如上所述,依據本發明的實施形態七,即使在多位元 資料=寫人時’直至全部的位料實地寫人為止反覆地發 ,再舄人要求’藉此能確實地進行多位元資料的寫入。外 邛的處理器或控制器係能藉由此再寫入要求來監控寫入狀 況,故寫入控制變得容易。 〔實施形態八〕 第34圖係顯示本發明的實施形態八的基準電壓產生 319644 79 200830313A diagram of the main part of the timing generator 3G2. In the configuration shown in Fig. 32, a busy signal generating circuit 4 is set in the timing generator 3A2. The busy signal generating circuit 4 is based on the verification result indicating signal from the 〇r circuit 3 Mp/F comes to the production line. The preparation signal V is in the configuration shown in Figure 32. Until the end of the end of the multi-bit data, the busy/preparation signal B/rz will be $ Busy. Therefore, the external processor or controller can detect the period of all bits of the multi-bit data. Write here According to the busy n preparation money B / RZ, the external device will become a special state. The configuration of the timing generator shown in the <2> diagram is the same as the configuration of the timing generator including the diagram 产生: generation circuit 233. The result indicates the signal p/F. In place of the verification of one — - as described above, according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, during the internal execution of the intrusion, the outside sends a busy anvil, t 彔 / preparation nickname. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the end of the data writing time and to avoid the conflict of access and only the correct data is written. [Embodiment 7] Fig. 1 is a view schematically showing the configuration of a main part of the timepiece production of the seventh embodiment of the present invention, 319644 78 200830313. In the 33rd picture, the device 3〇2 towel, according to the main verification result indicating signal Mp/ CLK, will send the re-writing person to request the job EQ to the outside. Therefore, == will resend the write WREQ repeatedly during the period when there is a bit that is badly written. In the internal, the verification result indication signal P/Fi for the end of the write 'will be stopped according to the configuration shown in the corresponding stop 2, until the end of the data write is the external line, the write command is sent repeatedly. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the correct information. In addition, the processor or controller may also be configured to re-enter Q to monitor the "condition, and in the pure number of times: write =; WREQ, determine that the corresponding bit is bad and perform the necessary error and 'rewrite The incoming request transmission circuit 412 generates a rewrite request wreq in synchronization with the clock signal (10) (which may also be an internal clock signal). However, as shown in FIG. 22, the read activation signal vf surface is read according to the verification. The main verification result indicating signal MP/F transmits the rewriting request WREQ in a manner not synchronized with the clock signal CM. As described above, according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention, even when the multi-bit data = writing person' Until all the bits are written in person, and then the person asks 'to be able to write the multi-bit data reliably. The processor or controller of the external device can rewrite the request by this. Since the write status is monitored, the write control becomes easy. [Embodiment 8] Fig. 34 shows the reference voltage generation according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. 319644 79 200830313

电路(Vref產生電路)42〇的構成的一例。第%圖所示的 .基準電壓產生電路42〇係對應第2圖或第15圖所示的W 產生私路’或者對應第26圖所示的Vref產生電路鳩的 構成。 一在第34圖中,基準電壓產生電路42〇係包含有·電阻 兀件f1至Z4’係串聯連接於電源節點與節點NDa之間; =疋電流源CIS,係連接於節點Νϋ&與接地節點之間。 ^ Da產生基準電壓心紆。在雙態觸變]^1^]^的情 線驅動電壓W係供給至位域驅動電路以及數位 只要分別設置基準電壓產生電路·,並且 過的基準電屋Vref至位元線驅動電路及 數位線驅動電路即可。 入型mram的情形中’亦對源極線驅動電路 此情形中’針對源極線驅動電路只要 設置的基n “ f 數L料料㈣另外 暴竿包壓產生電路所產生的基準電壓即可。 定ν'#係分別根據所供給的電路的特性來設 電路、以2 ° _對^數位線_電路、位元線驅動 電路Μ及源極線驅動電路分別產+ 壓位準可相同亦可不同。 但ι些電 電路420復包含有:切換元件加至 根據寫==凡件Ζ2至Ζ4並聯連接;選擇器422,係 閑CH0叉^ 號㈣來產生選擇信號;以及Α腳 根據選擇11.422的輪心t絲分別將切 319644 80 200830313 ‘換元件TX1及TX2驅動至導通狀態。 選擇器422的輸出信號亦被供給至切換元件TX3的閘 極。這些切換元件TX1至TX3係以分別由N通道MOS電 >晶體所構成之情形作為一例來顯示。然而,只要為根據供 給至控制電極的信號,選擇性地設定成導通/非導通狀態 的切換元件即可。這些切換元件TX1至TX3係分別於導 通時將對應的電阻元件Z2至Z4予以短路。 選擇器422係例如以移位暫存器(shift register )所構 ⑩成,根據寫入模式指示信號,在内部將電源電壓位準 的信號(Η位準的信號)予以移位。因此,每次產生寫入 模式指示信號Φ W時,在選擇器422的輸出信號中,變成 Η位準的信號的數目會增多。此情形中,作為一例,係考 慮以下的順序。當第一次產生寫入模式指示信號(D W時, 選擇器422被設定成初始狀態,且全部的切換元件ΤΧί至 ΤΧ3被設定成非導通狀態。接著,每次發送寫入模式指示 •信號Φ W時,切換元件ΤΧ3、ΤΧ2、以及ΤΧ1會依序變成 導通狀態。此情形中,將定電流源CIS所流通的電流設為 I時,基準電壓Vref會在以下的電壓位準間依序變化,: 初始值:VDD—lx (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) 最大值:VDD—IxZl 當電阻元件Z1至Z4的電阻值皆為相等之R時,基準 電壓Vref的電壓位準係以步階(step) IxR進行調整。 第35圖係顯示基準電壓Vref的變化順序之一例。基 準電壓Vref係農最小值Vref ( min )依序增大,達到最大- 81 319644 200830313 值Vref (max)。於中間值取電壓V1及V2。在此最大值 與最小值之間,以步階IxR來產生中間狀態的基準電壓。 在MRAM中,當寫入不良時,會回復至寫入前的狀 態。因此,當寫入不良時,會依序流通較多寫入電流,使 感應磁場或寫入電流增大,而確實地使記憶體單元的磁化 狀態產生變化。雖例如如快閃記憶體等,在寫入後其狀態 會變化的情形中,有產生過度寫入等之問題的可能性,但 ,MRAM中不會產生這種過度寫入的問題,能確實地執行 寫入。然雨,在雙態觸變MRAM的情形中,由於施加磁場 ,大時會破壞自由層的交換耦合,故限制其最大值。因此, 寫入時的基準電壓Vref必須設定成寫人容許最大值^【 ( max)以下的值。 如先前的實施形態所示,基準電壓Vref係供給至位元 線驅動電路、數位線驅動電路、以及/㈣極線驅動電路 中的驅動用的電晶體的閘極。因此,藉由依序增大基準電 #屢V时的電壓位準,能加大驅動電晶體的驅動電流量,而 能加大寫入電流。 亚且,在第34圖所示的構成中,供給寫入模式指示 號至選擇器422,選擇器422會依序進行移位動作 亚選擇性地將減元件TX1至τχ3㈣轉通狀態。 為供給至選擇器422的寫人模式指示信號㈣,只要為 以顯示在内部所產生的寫人之信號即可。亦可使用再寫 f示信號謂。根據對應的MRAM之構成,用以顯示! 馬入的次數之信號只要作為選擇器移位㈣信號來使; 319644 82 200830313 即可。 此外,選擇器422係以三階段來調整所產生的基準電 壓Vref的位準。然雨,基準電壓產生電路420所產生的基 準電壓Vref的再寫入時的電壓變化量亦可分割成多階 段。在最小寫入用的基準電壓Vref ( min )與最大基準電 壓Vref ( max )之間,只要以作用較小的步階依序來調整 基準電壓Vref的電壓位準即可。此外,根據再寫入次數, 亦可變化此步階數。 _ 〔變形例〕 第3 6圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態七的變形例 一的驅動電路430的構成圖。在第36圖中,驅動電路430 係自旋注入型.MRAM的位元線驅動電路或源極線驅動電 路。信號線SGL係自旋注入型MRAM中的位元線BL或 源極線SL。 驅動電路430係包含有内部信號中的前段電路432及 ⑩434;以及根據前段電路432及434的輸出信號來驅動信號 線SGL之驅動段436。前段電路432及434係將電源電壓 作為其高側動作電源電壓來接收。當驅動電路430為位元 線驅動電路時,前段電路432及434係分別為第16圖所示 的NAND電路及NOR電路。當驅動電路430為源極線驅 動電路時,前段電路432及434係第16圖所示的反相器電 路。 驅動段436係包含有·· P通道MOS電晶體PQ10,係 根據前段電路432的輸咄信號將信號線SGL驅動至基準電 83 319644 200830313 •壓Vref位準;以及N通道MOS電晶體NQ10,係根據前 段電路430的輸出信號將信號線SGL結合至接地節點。 ^ 藉由驅動電路430,信號線SGL係被驅動至基準電壓 • Vref,而另一方端係結合至接地節點。流通於信號線SGL 的寫入電流係能藉由基準電壓Vref的電壓位準來調整(配 線電阻相同,電流量係藉由基準電壓Vref與配線電阻的比 所供給)。 並且,數位線驅動電路一般係將數位線DL結合至接 ⑩地節點以流通數位線電流。當數位線係構成為一端結合至 接地節點,且選擇行的數位線係根據數位線驅動電路的輸 出電壓來流通電流的情形時,係能將第36圖所示的驅動電 路430作為數位線驅動電路來利用。能藉由基準電壓Vref 來調整數位線電流量。 〔變形例二〕 第37圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態八的變形例 馨二的構成圖。在第37圖中,於雙態觸變MRAM中係針對 位元線BL設置有電壓隨耦器(Voltage follower) 439。電 壓隨耦器439係於正輸入端接收基準電壓Vref,而負輸入 端則結合至對應的位元線BL。 於位元線BL的一方端設置有位元線驅動電路43 7。位 元線驅動電路437的高侧電源電壓為電源電壓。位元線驅 動電路437的構成係與第11圖所示的構成相同(係供給電 源電壓VDD以取代基準電壓Vref)。 在第37圖所示的構成中-,基準·電壓Vref係根據再寫 84 319644 200830313 入的次數來調整其電壓位準。位元線驅動電路437係在選 擇時將對應的位元線BL結合至電源節點。因此,藉由調 整基準電壓Vref的電壓位準,位元線bl兩端的電壓差會 不同,而能調整流通於位元線BL的電流量。 此情形中,隨著增加再寫入次數,會降低基準電壓Vref 的電壓位專。如此,隨著增加再寫入次數,能加大位元線 舄入電流量,因此能增大位元線電流感應磁場。 如此’在此情形中,於基準電壓產生電路中,第34 圖所示的選擇器422係依序增大所導通的切換元件τχι至 TX3的個數。 〔變形例三〕 第38圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態八的變形例3 的構成的寫入電流驅動活性化電路211的構成圖。在自旋 注入型MRAM中,寫入電流驅動活性化電路21丨係產生寫 入脈波信號W-PULSE (參照第24圖)。 在第3 8圖中,寫入電流驅動活性化電路2〗〗係包含 有:時序調整電路442,係將寫入指示檢測信號①…^延遲 固定時間;以及計數電路444,係根據寫入指示檢測信號 OWF而設定成初始值,且於寫入模式時,於每次驗證讀 出活性化信號VFREN的非活性化時進行計數動作。時序 調整電路442係將寫入指示檢測信號(DWF延遲固定時 間,以調整内部的寫入脈波信號WJpULSE的活性化時序。 馬入電流驅動活性化電路21丨復包含有··可變延遲電 路446,係將時序調整電路.442予以延遲;以及設定㈠以) 85 319644 200830313 -重置(reset)正反器448,係根據時序調整電路442的 輸出仏唬來進行設定,且根據可變延遲電路446的輪出仁 號來進行重置,並從其輸出Q產生寫入脈 = WJPULSE。 迷 可文延遲電路446的延遲量係藉由計數電路444的計 數值來調整。在此情形中,可變延遲電路祕亦可包含 複數個串級連接的延遲段,且根據計數電路444的輸出信 口末又疋用以輸出k號的延遲段。可變延遲電路446亦可 =複數&的延遲段所構成,且根據計數電路444的計數值 =設定各延遲段的驅動動作電流’以變更各延遲段的延 遲1 使用上述任一者的構成皆可。 第39圖係顯示第38圖所示的寫入電流驅動活性化電 路211的動作之信號波形圖。以下,參照第%圖,說明^ 38圖所示的舄入電流驅動活性化電路211的動作。 於資料寫入時,會根據來自外部的寫入指令而將寫入 指示檢測信號〇WF活性化(藉由指令解碼器内的寫入指 令檢測電路)。計數電路444的計數值錢定成初始值。 =此^可變延遲電路446的延遲量係被設定成初始值。在 乐一次的寫人時,根據此初始值來產生位元線寫人脈波传 號 W—PULSE 〇 计數電路444係響應驗證讀出活性化信號VFREN朝 _ f生化之遷移,來更新其计數值。如此,可變延遲電路 446係更新其初始值的延遲量,並將時序調整電路的 輸出信號、延遲達至預定值。根.據時序調整電路歇.的輸.出 319644 86 200830313 .信號來設定設定/重置正反器448,並將寫入脈波信號 W_PULSE活性化。接著,當經過可變延遲電路446所需 -的延遲時間後,正反器448會被重置,寫入脈波信號 -W_PULSE會被非活性化。因此,在第二次的寫入之後, 寫入脈波信號WJPULSE的脈波寬度會依序被更新。 如上所述,在MRAM中,當發生寫入不良時,寫入對 象的記憶體單元會回復至寫入前的狀態。因此,在此情形 中,藉由將寫入時間依序加長,雨能確實地將寫入資料寫 着入至寫入不良的記憶體單元。與快閃記憶體單元不同,由 於此寫入的初始狀態經常相同,故即使寫入時間長亦不會 發生過度寫入的問題。 如上所述,依據本發明的實施形態八,根據再寫入次 數來變更寫入條件,而能確實地將資料寫入至寫入對象的 記憶體早元。 〔實施形態九〕 第40圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態九的雙態觸 變MRAM的寫入電流驅動活十生4匕電路450的構成圖。從寫 入電流驅動活性化電路450產生數位線寫入電流活性化信 號WJDL及位元線寫入電流活性化信號WJBL。寫入電路 450係對應第19圖及第23圖所示的電路211或231。 寫入電流驅動活性化電路450係包含有串級連接的延 遲元件DLY1至DLY6;以及用以分別選擇延遲元件DLY2 至DLY6的輸出信號之選擇電路SLT1至SLT5。選擇電路 SLT1至SLT5的輸出係共通地結合,並產生寫入位元線驅 … 一— ‘ 、 . - >. 87 319644 200830313 動信號WJBL。 針對舄入屯流驅動活性化電路45〇設置選擇器々Μ。 選=器452係例如設置於時序產生器,並根據寫入模式指 严^㈣:擇一性地依序將選擇電路SLT1至SLT5驅 動至選擇狀態。因此,選擇器452亦可以移位暫存哭來構 成,該移位暫存器係根據寫入模式指示信號㈣而:二 初始值,亚依序根據時脈信號或驗證讀出活化 ㈣㈣㈣㈣料452亦可料數/解= 該計數/解碼電路係將寫人模式指示信號㈣ …亚將其计數值予以解碼。選擇電路SLT1至_ 只要擇一地驅動至選擇狀態即可。 • k擇電路SLT1至SLT5係於選擇時使對應的延遲元 的輸出信號通過,而於非選擇時變成輸出高阻抗狀態。因 =’係從延遲元件DLγ2至沉冗的輸出信號於至d 透擇一個#號作為寫入位元線驅動信號。 一广二j凡二DLY1至DLY6所具有的延遲時間為固 疋。舄入%脈信號CLKw係可於寫入模式時作 波信號而產生。此外,寫入時脈信號二: 係可為吊%產生的内部時脈信號CLKi。此情形中,寫入溆 位線驅動信號W—DL雖根據内部時脈信號咖丨而變化, 恶,故不會產生問題。 第41圖係顯示第4〇圖所示的寫入電流驅動活性 路的動作之時序圖。以下,參照第Μ,說明第切 319644 88 200830313 *圖所示的寫入電流驅動活性化電路450的動作。 V . 於資料寫入時,寫入時脈信號CLKw係作為具有預定 ’時間寬度的脈波信號而產生(或作為内部時脈信號CLKi •而常時供給)。延遲元件DLY1至DLY6係分別具有延遲 時間At,且依序將所接收到的信號予以延遲並輸出。首 先,來自初段的延遲元件DLY1的輸出信號D1係作為寫 入數位線驅動信號W_DL而產生。 選擇器452係於初次的寫入時被設定成初始狀態。因 ⑩此,延遲元件DLY2至DLY6任——者的輪出信號係被選擇。 如第41圖所示,當選擇延遲元件DLY2的輸忠信號D2時, 寫入位元線驅動信號W_BL係在時刻ta至時刻tc時間變 成Η位準。另 < 方面,當選擇最後段的延遲元件DLY6的 輸出信號DL6時,寫入位元線驅動信號W—BL係在時刻化 至時刻td之間變成Η位準。 在此期間内,係根據再寫入次數來依序延遲寫入位元 馨線驅動信號WJBL。對記憶體單元之寫入係在寫入數位線 電流活性化W_DL與寫入位元線驅動信號W_BL重合的期 間中進行(磁場的旋轉)。因此,藉由加長產生此合成磁 場的期間,能確實地將記憶體單元的可變磁性電阻元件 (MTJ元件)的磁化方向設定於數位線電流及位元線電流 所感應的磁場的合成磁場之方向,而能確實地執行寫入。 藉由於每次寫入時調整W_DL及WJ3L彼此的相對性 的時序關係,而能確實地執行資料的寫入。當寫入不良的 原因為磁場的分離不良(未產生自旋翻轉(spin flop )狀 89 319644 200830313 悲的狀態)時,係加長流通數位線電流的時間。當寫入不 •良的原因為磁場旋轉不良時,係加長流通位元線電流與數 位線電流的時間。當寫入不良的原因為因位元線電流導致 易磁化軸的旋轉不良時,係加長流通位元線電流的辟間。 根據這些寫入不良的原因來設定延遲時間的變更順序。於 測試時特定出發生概率高的不良原因,並設定延遲變更順 序0 、 〔變形例〕 第42圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施 流㈣活性化電路45〇的變形例的構成圖。在第42= 的舄入電流驅動活性化電路450中分別設置有選擇電路 SLT10至SLT12,係分別對應延遲元件DLY1至DLY3的 輸^選擇電路SLT1()至SLT係根據來自選擇器452的輸 娩而擇一性地變成導通狀態,並於非選擇時變 尚阻抗狀態。 y 7擇盗452係與第40阖所示的構成相同,係根據寫/ f式名示信號①霄來設定初始值並執行計數動作。選擇著 二:可根據驗證讀出活性化信號(VFREN)取代此寫/ 二』不k號Φ W來進行計數動作。將用以顯示内部所驾 人次數之信號作為選擇移位控制信號來湘,且遥 二:要構成為根據移位控制信號來計數再寫入次數並產 生對,其計數值的選擇信號即可。 .接的2電流驅動活性化電路彻復包含有:兩段串級連 、兀件DLY10及Dlyu,係接收選擇電路slti〔 319644 90 200830313 ‘至SLT12的輸出信號;以及OR電路454,係接收選擇電 路SLT10至SLT12中任一者的輸出信號與延遲元件DLY1 ‘的輸出信號D1。從延遲元件DLY11產生寫入位元線驅動 ’信號W—BL,從OR電路454產生寫入數位線驅動信號 W_DL。 第43圖係顯示第42圖所示的寫入電流驅動活性化電 路450的動作之時序圖。以下,參照第43圖,說明第42 圖所示的寫入電流驅動活性化電路450的動作。 > 首先,考慮選擇器452已選擇選擇電路SLT12的狀 態。此情形中,寫入數位線驅動信號W_DL係與延遲元件 DLY1的輸出信號D1的上升同步地上升,接著,響應延遲 元件DLY3的輸出信號D3的下降而下降。 另一方面,寫入數位線驅動信號W_BL係相對於延遲 元件DLY3的輸出信號D3,以延遲元件DLY10及DLY11 所具有的延遲時間來延遲變化。 > 因此,在寫入數位線驅動信號W_DL為Η位準,且寫 入位元線驅動信號WJBL為非活性狀態時,在可變磁性電 阻元件(MTJ元件)中,係確立自旋翻轉狀態。接著,當 寫入數位線驅動信號W_DL及寫入位元線驅動信號W_BL 皆變成Η位準時,以合成磁場所產生的記億體單元的可變 磁性電阻元件的磁化方向會旋轉。 並且,當數位線電流停止後,在寫入位元線驅動信號 W_BL處於活性狀態的期間中,會進一步旋轉記憶體單元 -的可變磁性電阻元件的磁化方向,而將其磁化方〜向設定成 91 319644 200830313 •使易磁化軸方向與位元線電流感應磁場呈45度的方向。 因此,在此情形中,亦能藉由選擇器42擇一地將選擇 ‘電路SLT10至SLT12設定成選擇狀態,藉此而能調整寫入 時間,能確實地進行資料的寫入。 當寫入不良為未形成自旋翻轉狀態的不良情形時,係 以加長寫入時間的方式,於每次寫入次數依序增大寫入時 間。另一方面,當此合成磁場很弱時,係以加長寫入時間 的方式來設定選擇電路SLT10至SLT12的選擇順序。因 ⑩此,寫入位元線電流活性化信號W_BL係能在第43圖中 以箭頭所示的範圍内使波形移動。 此外,在第41圖所示的寫入電流驅動活性化電路410 中i係未使用延遲元件DLY4至DLY6。爲了、產生與其他 寫入相關連部分的檔案信號,亦可使用延遲元件DLY4至 DLY6的輸出信號04至06。例如,在設定驗證讀出活性 化信號VFREN的活性化時,亦可使用延遲元件DL Y5及 • DLY6的輸出信號D5及D6。 如上所述,依據本發明的實施形態九,在雙態觸變 , MRAM中,能在内部的再寫入時調整流通數位線電流及位 元線電流的期間,以正確地執行寫入。 此外,本實施形態九亦可組合其他的實施形態一至七 所示的雙態觸變MRAM的構成來使用。 本發明係能適用於將MTJ元件及MJT元件等之可變 磁性電阻元件作為記憶元件來利用之磁性體記憶體 (MRAM )。作為MRAM,係可為單體的記憶體,亦可如 92 319644 200830313An example of the configuration of the circuit (Vref generating circuit) 42A. The reference voltage generating circuit 42 shown in Fig. 100 corresponds to the W generating private path shown in Fig. 2 or Fig. 15 or the Vref generating circuit 所示 shown in Fig. 26. In Fig. 34, the reference voltage generating circuit 42 includes a resistor element f1 to Z4' connected in series between the power supply node and the node NDa; = 疋 current source CIS is connected to the node Νϋ & Between nodes. ^ Da produces a reference voltage heart. In the case of the two-state thixotropy]^1^]^, the reticle drive voltage W is supplied to the bit-field drive circuit and the digits are respectively set to the reference voltage generation circuit, and the reference electric house Vref to the bit line drive circuit and the digits The line drive circuit can be. In the case of the in-type mram, 'also for the source line driver circuit. In this case, the base line for the source line driver circuit can be set as long as the base n "f number L material (4) is additionally used to generate the reference voltage generated by the circuit. The fixed ν'# system is designed according to the characteristics of the supplied circuit, and the 2 ° _ pair digit line _ circuit, the bit line drive circuit Μ and the source line drive circuit respectively produce the same + pressure level. However, the electrical circuit 420 includes: the switching component is added to be connected in parallel according to the write == the parts Ζ2 to Ζ4; the selector 422 is the idle CH0 fork ^ (4) to generate the selection signal; The wheel center t wire of 11.422 will be cut to 319644 80 200830313 'the components TX1 and TX2 are driven to the on state respectively. The output signal of the selector 422 is also supplied to the gate of the switching element TX3. These switching elements TX1 to TX3 are respectively The case where the N-channel MOS electric current is formed is shown as an example. However, it is only necessary to selectively set the switching element to the on/off state based on the signal supplied to the control electrode. These switching elements TX1 to TX3 Corresponding resistive elements Z2 to Z4 are respectively short-circuited during turn-on. The selector 422 is configured, for example, by a shift register, and internally sets the power supply voltage level according to the write mode indication signal. The signal (the level-aligned signal) is shifted. Therefore, each time the write mode indication signal Φ W is generated, the number of signals that become the Η level increases in the output signal of the selector 422. In this case, As an example, the following order is considered. When the write mode instruction signal (DW is generated for the first time, the selector 422 is set to the initial state, and all the switching elements ΤΧί to ΤΧ3 are set to the non-conduction state. Then, each The secondary transmission write mode indication • When the signal Φ W, the switching elements ΤΧ3, ΤΧ2, and ΤΧ1 are sequentially turned on. In this case, when the current flowing through the constant current source CIS is set to I, the reference voltage Vref will be The following voltage levels change sequentially: Initial value: VDD—lx (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) Maximum value: VDD—IxZl When the resistance values of the resistance elements Z1 to Z4 are equal to each other, the reference voltage V The voltage level of ref is adjusted by step IxR. Fig. 35 shows an example of the order of change of the reference voltage Vref. The reference voltage Vref is increased by the minimum value Vref (min) to the maximum - 81 319644 200830313 The value Vref (max). Take the voltages V1 and V2 at the intermediate value. Between this maximum value and the minimum value, the reference voltage of the intermediate state is generated by the step IxR. In the MRAM, when the writing is bad, Revert to the state before writing. Therefore, when the writing is defective, a large amount of writing current flows in order to increase the induced magnetic field or the writing current, and the magnetization state of the memory cell is surely changed. For example, in the case of flash memory or the like, in a case where the state thereof changes after writing, there is a possibility of occurrence of an excessive write or the like. However, the problem of such overwriting does not occur in the MRAM, and it can be confirmed. Write is performed locally. However, in the case of the two-state thixotropic MRAM, since the magnetic field is applied, the exchange coupling of the free layer is destroyed at a large time, so the maximum value is limited. Therefore, the reference voltage Vref at the time of writing must be set to a value below the allowable maximum value ^[(max). As shown in the previous embodiment, the reference voltage Vref is supplied to the gate of the transistor for driving in the bit line driving circuit, the bit line driving circuit, and/or the (qua) line driving circuit. Therefore, by sequentially increasing the voltage level of the reference voltage # repeatedly V, the amount of driving current of the driving transistor can be increased, and the writing current can be increased. Further, in the configuration shown in Fig. 34, the write mode indication number is supplied to the selector 422, and the selector 422 sequentially shifts the elements TX1 to τχ3 (4) to the on state. The write mode indication signal (4) supplied to the selector 422 may be a signal for writing a person generated internally. You can also use the re-write f signal. According to the composition of the corresponding MRAM, the signal for displaying the number of times of the horse is only required to be shifted by the selector (4) signal; 319644 82 200830313. Further, the selector 422 adjusts the level of the generated reference voltage Vref in three stages. However, the amount of voltage change at the time of rewriting of the reference voltage Vref generated by the reference voltage generating circuit 420 can be divided into a plurality of stages. Between the minimum reference voltage Vref (min) and the maximum reference voltage Vref (max), the voltage level of the reference voltage Vref may be adjusted in order of a smaller step. In addition, depending on the number of rewrites, this step can also be changed. [Modification] Fig. 3 is a view schematically showing the configuration of a drive circuit 430 according to a modification 1 of the seventh embodiment of the present invention. In Fig. 36, the drive circuit 430 is a bit line drive circuit or a source line drive circuit of a spin injection type MRAM. The signal line SGL is a bit line BL or a source line SL in a spin injection type MRAM. The driving circuit 430 includes front-end circuits 432 and 10434 in the internal signal; and a driving section 436 for driving the signal line SGL based on the output signals of the preceding-stage circuits 432 and 434. The front-end circuits 432 and 434 receive the power supply voltage as their high-side operating power supply voltage. When the drive circuit 430 is a bit line drive circuit, the front stage circuits 432 and 434 are the NAND circuit and the NOR circuit shown in Fig. 16, respectively. When the drive circuit 430 is a source line drive circuit, the front stage circuits 432 and 434 are the inverter circuits shown in Fig. 16. The driving section 436 includes a P-channel MOS transistor PQ10, which drives the signal line SGL to the reference power 83 319644 200830313 according to the input signal of the front-end circuit 432. • The voltage Vref level; and the N-channel MOS transistor NQ10. The signal line SGL is coupled to the ground node in accordance with the output signal of the front stage circuit 430. ^ By the driving circuit 430, the signal line SGL is driven to the reference voltage • Vref, and the other end is coupled to the ground node. The write current flowing through the signal line SGL can be adjusted by the voltage level of the reference voltage Vref (the wiring resistance is the same, and the current amount is supplied by the ratio of the reference voltage Vref to the wiring resistance). Moreover, the digit line driving circuit generally combines the digit line DL to the ground node to circulate the digit line current. When the digit line system is configured such that one end is coupled to the ground node, and the digit line of the selected row is a current flowing according to the output voltage of the digit line driving circuit, the driving circuit 430 shown in FIG. 36 can be driven as a digit line. The circuit is used. The digital line current can be adjusted by the reference voltage Vref. [Modification 2] Fig. 37 is a view schematically showing a configuration of a modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. In Fig. 37, a voltage follower 439 is provided for the bit line BL in the two-state thixotropic MRAM. The voltage follower 439 is connected to the positive input terminal to receive the reference voltage Vref, and the negative input terminal is coupled to the corresponding bit line BL. A bit line drive circuit 43 7 is provided at one end of the bit line BL. The high side power supply voltage of the bit line driving circuit 437 is the power supply voltage. The bit line driving circuit 437 has the same configuration as that shown in Fig. 11 (the power supply voltage VDD is supplied instead of the reference voltage Vref). In the configuration shown in Fig. 37, the reference voltage Vref is adjusted in accordance with the number of times of rewriting 84 319644 200830313. The bit line drive circuit 437 combines the corresponding bit line BL to the power supply node at the time of selection. Therefore, by adjusting the voltage level of the reference voltage Vref, the voltage difference across the bit line bl is different, and the amount of current flowing through the bit line BL can be adjusted. In this case, as the number of rewrites is increased, the voltage level of the reference voltage Vref is lowered. Thus, as the number of rewrites is increased, the amount of current in the bit line can be increased, so that the bit line current induced magnetic field can be increased. Thus, in this case, in the reference voltage generating circuit, the selector 422 shown in Fig. 34 sequentially increases the number of switching elements τ χ to TX3 that are turned on. [Modification 3] FIG. 38 is a view schematically showing the configuration of the write current drive activation circuit 211 having the configuration of the third modification of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. In the spin injection type MRAM, the write current drive activating circuit 21 generates a write pulse signal W-PULSE (refer to Fig. 24). In the third drawing, the write current drive activation circuit 2 includes: a timing adjustment circuit 442 that delays the write instruction detection signal 1...^ for a fixed time; and a count circuit 444 that is based on the write instruction. The detection signal OWF is set to an initial value, and in the write mode, the counting operation is performed every time the activation of the read activation signal VFREN is verified. The timing adjustment circuit 442 writes the instruction detection signal (DWF is delayed by a fixed time to adjust the activation timing of the internal write pulse signal WJpULSE. The horse-in current drive activation circuit 21 includes the variable delay circuit 446. Delaying the timing adjustment circuit .442; and setting (a) to 85 319644 200830313 - resetting the flip-flop 448 according to the output 仏唬 of the timing adjustment circuit 442, and according to the variable delay circuit The 446 rounds out the reset number and generates a write pulse = WJPULSE from its output Q. The delay amount of the delay circuit 446 is adjusted by the count value of the counting circuit 444. In this case, the variable delay circuit can also include a plurality of cascade connected delay segments, and is further used to output a delay segment of k according to the output of the counting circuit 444. The variable delay circuit 446 can also be configured as a delay section of the complex number & and based on the count value of the counter circuit 444 = setting the drive operation current of each delay section to change the delay of each delay section 1 using any of the above configurations Can be. Fig. 39 is a signal waveform diagram showing the operation of the write current drive activating circuit 211 shown in Fig. 38. Hereinafter, the operation of the inrush current drive activation circuit 211 shown in Fig. 38 will be described with reference to the % diagram. At the time of data writing, the write instruction detection signal 〇WF is activated in accordance with a write command from the outside (by the write command detection circuit in the instruction decoder). The count value of the counting circuit 444 is set to an initial value. = The delay amount of this variable delay circuit 446 is set to an initial value. When the person writes once, the bit line is written according to the initial value to write the human wave wave mark W-PULSE. The counting circuit 444 is responsive to verifying that the read activation signal VFREN is moving toward the biochemical transition of _f to update the meter. Value. Thus, the variable delay circuit 446 updates the delay amount of its initial value and delays the output signal of the timing adjustment circuit to a predetermined value. According to the timing adjustment circuit, the output of the circuit is set to 319644 86 200830313. The signal is set to set/reset the flip-flop 448, and the write pulse signal W_PULSE is activated. Then, after the delay time required by the variable delay circuit 446, the flip-flop 448 is reset, and the write pulse signal -W_PULSE is deactivated. Therefore, after the second write, the pulse width of the write pulse signal WJPULSE is sequentially updated. As described above, in the MRAM, when a write failure occurs, the memory cell of the write target returns to the state before the write. Therefore, in this case, by sequentially increasing the write time, the rain can surely write the write data to the memory unit that is poorly written. Unlike the flash memory cells, the initial state of writing is often the same, so the problem of overwriting does not occur even if the writing time is long. As described above, according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention, the writing condition is changed in accordance with the number of rewriting times, and the data can be surely written to the memory element of the writing target. [Embodiment 9] Fig. 40 is a view schematically showing the configuration of a write current driving live Xenon circuit 450 of a two-state toggle MRAM according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention. The digit line write current activation signal WJDL and the bit line write current activation signal WJBL are generated from the write current drive activation circuit 450. The write circuit 450 corresponds to the circuit 211 or 231 shown in Figs. 19 and 23. The write current drive activating circuit 450 includes delay elements DLY1 to DLY6 connected in series, and selection circuits SLT1 to SLT5 for selecting output signals of the delay elements DLY2 to DLY6, respectively. The outputs of the selection circuits SLT1 to SLT5 are commonly combined, and a write bit line drive is generated. - _, . - >. 87 319644 200830313 The dynamic signal WJBL. The selector 々Μ is set for the intrusion turbulence drive activation circuit 45. The selector = 452 is, for example, provided to the timing generator, and drives the selection circuits SLT1 to SLT5 to the selected state in order according to the write mode constraint ^(4). Therefore, the selector 452 can also be configured by shifting the temporary storage crying according to the write mode indication signal (4): two initial values, sub-sequence activation according to the clock signal or verification readout (4) (4) (four) (four) material 452 It is also possible that the count/decoding circuit will decode the count value by writing the human mode indication signal (4). The selection circuits SLT1 to _ can be selectively driven to the selected state. • The k-select circuits SLT1 to SLT5 are used to pass the output signal of the corresponding delay element when selected, and become the output high-impedance state when not selected. Since =' is from the delay element DLγ2 to the redundant output signal to the d, a ## is selected as the write bit line drive signal. The delay time of the two DLY1 to DLY6 is fixed. The input % pulse signal CLKw can be generated by generating a wave signal in the write mode. In addition, the write clock signal 2: can be the internal clock signal CLKi generated by the crane %. In this case, the write 溆 bit line drive signal W_DL changes depending on the internal clock signal, so there is no problem. Fig. 41 is a timing chart showing the operation of the write current drive active path shown in Fig. 4. Hereinafter, the operation of the write current drive activation circuit 450 shown in Fig. 319644 88 200830313 * will be described with reference to the third section. V. At the time of data writing, the write clock signal CLKw is generated as a pulse wave signal having a predetermined 'time width' (or is constantly supplied as the internal clock signal CLKi). The delay elements DLY1 to DLY6 have delay times At, respectively, and sequentially delay the received signals and output them. First, the output signal D1 from the delay element DLY1 of the first stage is generated as the write digit line drive signal W_DL. The selector 452 is set to the initial state at the time of the initial writing. As a result, the wheeling signals of any of the delay elements DLY2 to DLY6 are selected. As shown in Fig. 41, when the input signal D2 of the delay element DLY2 is selected, the write bit line drive signal W_BL becomes a Η level at time ta to time tc. On the other hand, when the output signal DL6 of the delay element DLY6 of the last stage is selected, the write bit line drive signal W_BL becomes a Η level between the time and the time td. During this period, the write bit line drive signal WJBL is sequentially delayed according to the number of rewrites. The writing to the memory cell is performed during the period in which the write digit line current activation W_DL coincides with the write bit line drive signal W_BL (rotation of the magnetic field). Therefore, by lengthening the period in which the combined magnetic field is generated, the magnetization direction of the variable magnetic resistance element (MTJ element) of the memory cell can be surely set to the combined magnetic field of the magnetic field induced by the digit line current and the bit line current. Direction, and can perform writes reliably. By adjusting the timing relationship of the relative relationship between W_DL and WJ3L each time writing, the writing of the data can be surely performed. When the cause of the write failure is a poor separation of the magnetic field (a spin flop is not generated in the state of 89 319644 200830313 sorrow), the time for flowing the digit line current is lengthened. When the reason for writing is not good, the magnetic field is poorly rotated, and the time for flowing the bit line current and the digital line current is lengthened. When the cause of the write failure is caused by the poor rotation of the easy magnetization axis due to the bit line current, the transition of the current of the flow bit line is lengthened. The order of changing the delay time is set based on the cause of these write failures. In the test, the cause of the defect is high, and the delay change order is set to 0. [Modification] Fig. 42 is a view schematically showing a configuration of a modification of the embodiment (4) activation circuit 45A of the present invention. In the inrush current drive activation circuit 450 of the 42th=, selection circuits SLT10 to SLT12 are respectively provided, and the selection circuits SLT1() to SLT corresponding to the delay elements DLY1 to DLY3 are respectively based on the delivery from the selector 452. It is selectively turned into a conducting state and becomes an impedance state when it is not selected. The y 7 selection 452 is the same as the configuration shown in the 40th, and the initial value is set based on the write/f type name signal 1 并 and the counting operation is performed. Option 2: The write operation can be performed by replacing the write/secondary and no k Φ W according to the verification read activation signal (VFREN). The signal for displaying the number of people driving inside is selected as the shift control signal, and the second is configured to count the number of rewrites according to the shift control signal and generate a pair, and the selection signal of the count value can be . The connected current-driven activation circuit includes: two-stage cascade connection, DLY10 and Dlyu, which are output signals of the selection circuit slti[319644 90 200830313 'to SLT12; and OR circuit 454, receiving selection The output signal of any of the circuits SLT10 to SLT12 and the output signal D1 of the delay element DLY1'. The write bit line drive 'signal W-BL is generated from the delay element DLY11, and the write bit line drive signal W_DL is generated from the OR circuit 454. Fig. 43 is a timing chart showing the operation of the write current drive activating circuit 450 shown in Fig. 42. Hereinafter, the operation of the write current drive activation circuit 450 shown in Fig. 42 will be described with reference to Fig. 43. > First, consider the state in which the selector 452 has selected the selection circuit SLT12. In this case, the write digit line drive signal W_DL rises in synchronization with the rise of the output signal D1 of the delay element DLY1, and then falls in response to the fall of the output signal D3 of the delay element DLY3. On the other hand, the write digit line drive signal W_BL is delayed with respect to the output signal D3 of the delay element DLY3 by the delay time of the delay elements DLY10 and DLY11. > Therefore, when the write digit line drive signal W_DL is at the Η level and the write bit line drive signal WJBL is in an inactive state, in the variable magnetic resistance element (MTJ element), the spin flip state is established. . Then, when both the write digit line drive signal W_DL and the write bit line drive signal W_BL become clamped, the magnetization direction of the variable magnetic resistance element of the unit cell generated by the combined magnetic field is rotated. Further, after the digit line current is stopped, while the write bit line drive signal W_BL is in the active state, the magnetization direction of the variable magnetic resistance element of the memory unit is further rotated, and the magnetization direction is set. 91 319644 200830313 • The direction of the easy magnetization axis is 45 degrees with the bit line current induced magnetic field. Therefore, in this case as well, the selection "circuits SLT10 to SLT12 can be selectively set to the selected state by the selector 42, whereby the writing time can be adjusted, and the writing of the data can be surely performed. When the write failure is a failure condition in which the spin flip state is not formed, the write time is sequentially increased for each write count in such a manner that the write time is lengthened. On the other hand, when the combined magnetic field is weak, the selection order of the selection circuits SLT10 to SLT12 is set in such a manner as to lengthen the writing time. Therefore, the write bit line current activation signal W_BL can shift the waveform within the range indicated by the arrow in Fig. 43. Further, in the write current drive activating circuit 410 shown in Fig. 41, the delay elements DLY4 to DLY6 are not used. The output signals 04 to 06 of the delay elements DLY4 to DLY6 can also be used in order to generate file signals associated with other writes. For example, when the activation of the verification read activation signal VFREN is set, the output signals D5 and D6 of the delay elements DL Y5 and DLY6 can also be used. As described above, according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention, in the two-state thixotropic or MRAM, the period in which the digit line current and the bit line current are passed can be adjusted during internal rewriting to accurately perform writing. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the configuration of the two-state thixotropic MRAM shown in the other first to seventh embodiments can be used in combination. The present invention is applicable to a magnetic memory (MRAM) which is used as a memory element by using a variable magnetic resistance element such as an MTJ element or an MJT element. As the MRAM, it can be a single memory, or as 92 319644 200830313

並非用來限疋不贫明,本發明纪 ,本發明的範圍可清楚地理解為 β微電腦般^ 以上雖 請專利範圍來解釋。 【圖式簡單說明】 早元的剖面構造 第1圖係概略地顯示雙態觸變mram 之圖。 ⑩元陣列内的配置之圖。 第2圖係概略地顯示雙態觸變]^&入]^單元的記憶體單 元的寫入順序之圖。 第3圖係概略地顯不第2圖所示的雙態觸變單 第4圖係概略地顯示自旋注入型MRAM單元的剖面構 造之圖。 第5圖(A )及(B)係顯示自旋注入型MRAM單元 的資料寫入時磁化方向與寫入電流的方向之圖。 第6圖係概略地顯示本發明的mram的整體構成之 丨 第7圖係顯示本發明的mram的寫入順序之流程圖。 第8圖係顯示本發明的MRAM的另一寫入順序之流程 圖。 弟9圖(A )至(C )係概略地顯示資料寫入時的寫入 條件與不良產生概率的關係之圖。 第10圖係係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態一的雙態 觸變MRAM的整體構成之圖。, 319644 93 200830313 第π圖係更具體地顳示第ι〇圖所示的雙態觸變 MRAM的主要部分的構成之圖。 第12圖係顯示第圖所示的雙態觸變MRAM的寫入 動作之信號波形圖。 第13圖係顯示第1〇圖所示的wl驅動器所含之字線 驅動器電路的構成之一例之圖。 第14圖係顯不本發明的實施形態一的變形例的列選 擇部的構成之圖。It is not intended to limit the scope of the invention, and the scope of the present invention can be clearly understood as a β microcomputer. [Simple description of the diagram] Sectional structure of the early element Fig. 1 schematically shows the diagram of the two-state thixotropic mram. A diagram of the configuration within a 10-element array. Fig. 2 is a view schematically showing the writing order of the memory cells of the two-state thixotropic]^& Fig. 3 is a view schematically showing a two-state thixotropic display shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 4 is a view schematically showing a cross-sectional structure of a spin injection type MRAM cell. Fig. 5 (A) and (B) are views showing the direction of magnetization and the direction of writing current when data is written by the spin injection type MRAM cell. Fig. 6 is a view schematically showing the overall configuration of the mram of the present invention. Fig. 7 is a flow chart showing the writing sequence of the mram of the present invention. Fig. 8 is a flow chart showing another writing sequence of the MRAM of the present invention. Figs. 9(A) to (C) schematically show the relationship between the writing conditions at the time of writing data and the probability of occurrence of defects. Fig. 10 is a view schematically showing the overall configuration of a two-state thixotropic MRAM according to the first embodiment of the present invention. , 319644 93 200830313 The πth diagram more specifically shows the composition of the main part of the two-state thixotropic MRAM shown in Fig. Fig. 12 is a signal waveform diagram showing the writing operation of the two-state thixotropic MRAM shown in the figure. Fig. 13 is a view showing an example of the configuration of a word line driver circuit included in the wl driver shown in Fig. 1. Fig. 14 is a view showing the configuration of a column selection unit according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.

第15圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態一的變形例 的自旋注入型MRAM的整體構成之圖。 第16圖係更具體地顯示第15圖所示的自旋注入型 MRAM的主要部分的構成之圖。 第圖係顯示第 的信號波形圖。 圖所示的MrAm的資料寫入順序 ,値皮第18圖係顯示本發明的實施形態二的MRAM的寫入 順序之時序圖。 =19 ®係概略軸林發明的實施形態二的败施 ^解Μ及時序產生器的構成之圖。 的於ί Γ圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態二的MRAM 的^解㈣及時序產生器的變形例之圖。 器的ΐ二圖係f示第2〇圖所示的指令解碼器及時序產生 W貝枓舄入時的動作之時序圖。 第22圖係概略地顯示本Fig. 15 is a view schematically showing the overall configuration of a spin injection type MRAM according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 16 is a view showing more specifically the configuration of the main portion of the spin injection type MRAM shown in Fig. 15. The figure shows the signal waveform of the first signal. The data writing sequence of MrAm shown in the figure is a timing chart showing the writing sequence of the MRAM according to the second embodiment of the present invention. =19 ® is a diagram showing the configuration of the second embodiment of the schematic shafting invention and the configuration of the timing generator. The diagram of the MRAM of the second embodiment of the present invention and a modification of the timing generator are schematically shown in the drawings. The second diagram of the device shows the timing chart of the operation of the instruction decoder and the timing sequence shown in Fig. 2 . Figure 22 shows this diagram roughly

的主要部分的構成之圖.。㈣貫施形三的MRAM 319644 94 200830313 作二3圖圖係顯示第22圖所示的構成之資料寫入時的動 的係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態三的變形例 、/自、旨令解竭器及時序產生器的構成之圖。 „.二二圖係顯示第24圖所示的指令解碼器及時序產生 °°的—貝料舄入時的動作之時序圖。 第26圖係概略地_ 的整體構成之圖。 毛明的貝施形態四的*鳩 弟27圖係顯示第26圖所示的mramThe composition of the main part of the diagram. (4) MRAM 319644 94 200830313 is a diagram showing the movement of the structure shown in Fig. 22, and the modification of the third embodiment of the present invention is schematically shown. A diagram showing the composition of the depletion device and the timing generator. „. 二二图 shows the timing diagram of the operation of the instruction decoder and the timing-inducing-before-injection shown in Figure 24. Figure 26 is a diagram showing the overall structure of the _. The pattern of the 4th brother of the Besch form 4 shows the mram shown in Fig. 26.

之流程圖。 只/T 弟28圖係概略地顯示第26圖所示的副寫入系電路的 主要部分的構成之圖。 弟29圖係概略地顯示第%圖所示的 源極_碼控制電路的構成之I $路的 弟30圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態五的 ❿的主要部分的構成之圖。 。第31圖係顯示指令解碼器的資料寫入時的動作之流 程圖。 弟32圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態六的mRam 的主要部分的構成之圖。Flow chart. The figure of the main portion of the sub-writing system shown in Fig. 26 is schematically shown in the figure of only the T-Ter. The diagram showing the configuration of the main portion of the fifth embodiment of the fifth embodiment of the present invention is schematically shown in Fig. 30. . Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing the operation at the time of writing the data of the instruction decoder. The figure 32 is a view schematically showing the configuration of the main part of mRam according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention.

第33圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態七的 的主要部分的構成之圖。 AM ^第34圖係顯示本發明的實施形態八的MRAM的基準 電壓產生電路的構成之一例之圖。· 一 319644 95 200830313 準恭壓#牛T ^ Μ圖所示的基準電壓產生電路的基 竿电Μ的步驟之圖。 -的主圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態八的題Μ 的主要部分的變形例的構成之圖。 的主=\圖_略地顯示本發明的實施形態人的MRΑΜ 的主”分的第二變形例的構成之圖。 的主ΐΓ、圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態八的通ΑΜ 的主要^的第三變形例的構成之圖。 圖。昂39圖係顯示第38圖所示的電路的動作之信號波形 士弟40圖係概略地顯示本發明的實施形態九的寫入電 〜驅動活性化電路的構成之圖。 ”、、 路的Lr圖係顯示第40圖所示的寫入電流驅動活性化電 路的動作之時序圖。 活生=42圖係顯示本發明的實施形態九的寫入電流驅動 广舌性化電路的變形例之圖。 第43圖係顯示第42圖所示的電路動作之時序 【主要元件符號說明】 了乱 1、11 自由層 2 - 12 釘扎層 3 穿隧阻障層 13 穿隧絕緣膜 20 記憶體單元陣列 22 … 寫入系電路 319644 96 200830313 23 讀出系電路 24 寫入控制電路 50 X解碼器 52 DL驅動器/1[驅動器 54 Y解碼器 56、76 位元線驅動器 58、90 讀出放大器 60 、 306 Vref產生電路 62、112、300、400 指令解碼器 64、114、210、302 聘序產生器 65 . 輸入資料閂鎖器 66、116 比較器 67 輸出資料閂鎖器 69 位址閂鎖器 70 數位線解碼電路(X解碼電路) 72 數位線驅動電路 73 解碼控制電路 74 Y解碼電路 78 感測放大器 80 X位址解碼電路 82 字線驅動電路 92 寫入驅動器 100 源極線解碼器 102 源極線驅動器 97 319644 200830313 • 120 、 380 122 —202、222 ’ 204、304、 206 ^ 224 208 211 、 231 212 ^ 232 • 213 、 233 214 、 234 215 、 235 240 242 、 250 370i 376i A 382 402 404 、 444 412 420 422 、 452 430 432 ^ 434 源極線解碼控制電路 源極線解碼電路 寫入指令檢測電路 408、454 OR 電路 寫入活性化電路 預讀禁止電路 寫入電流驅動活性化電路 驗證活性化電路 、410 忙碌信號產生電路 閂鎖器 、406 脈波產生電路 切換電路 再寫入要求發送電路 數位線解碼電路 位元線解碼控制電路 AND閘 寫入指令檢測電路 計數電路 再寫入要求發送電路 基準電壓產生電路 、453 選擇器 驅動電路 前段電路 驅動段 ^ 98 319644 436 200830313 ^ 437 位元線驅動電路 439 電壓隨1禺器 * 442 時序調整電路 446 可變延遲電路 448 設定/重置正反器 450 寫入電流驅動活性化電路 AD 位址信號 ADD 内部位址信號 • AF 非磁性膜 BL、BLOiBLn 位元線 B/RZ 忙碌/就绪信號 CMP 比較電路 CLK 時脈信號 CLKi 内部時脈信號 CIS 定電流源 • COMOjCOMn 比較器 DDLO 至 DDLn 輸入資料閂鎖器 DL 數位線 DO 外部讀出資料 DOO 至 DOn 副輸出資料 DI、DIO 至 Din 輸入資料 DLY1 至 DLY6、 DLY10、DLY11 延遲元件 E 電子 ΕΝ、ENO 至 ENn 、ENi 感測活性化信號 99 319644 200830313 ^ EG EXOR 閘 FM1、FM2 強磁性膜 G1 至 G10、G3i、G8i、G9i AND 閘 T OG1 至 OG4、OGli、OG3i、OG4i OR 閘 HI > H2 磁場 IVK1JIVK4 反相器電路 IV3、IV4、IV4i 反相器 Iw 寫入電流 ⑩MC 記憶體單元 ΜΒ0 至 MBn 記憶體區塊 MP/F 主驗證結果指不信號 NG1 至 NG4 NAND 閘 NK1 NAND電路 NRK1 NOR電路 NQ1 至 NQ4、NQ10 N通道MOS電晶體 • NDa 節點 PAD 連接墊 P/F 比較器的輸出信號(驗證結果指示信號) P/Fi 驗證結果指示信號 PQ1 至 PQ4、PQ10 P通道MOS電晶體 QDL0 ^ QDLn 輸出資料閂鎖器 RD 讀出資料 Read RGO 至 RGn 言買出指不信號 讀出閘極、讀出列選擇閘極 RGO 至 RGn 100 319644 200830313 ^ RCSLi 讀出列選擇閘極 RCSL0至RCSLn讀出列選擇信號 RSK0 至 RSKn 讀出列選擇電路 | ROL 内部讀出資料線 SΑΚ0至SΑΚη 感测放大器電路 SCK0至SCKn、SCKi感測控制電路 SL 源極線 SLT1 至 SLT5、SLT10 至 SLT12 選擇電路 響SGL 信號線 SBW0 至 SBWn、 SBWi 副寫入系電路 TRS 存取電晶體 TX1 至 TX3 切換元件 VDD 電源電壓 VR 可變磁性電阻元件、可變電阻元件 VREFR 讀出基準電壓 ^ Vref 基準電壓 VJFREN 驗證讀出活性化信號 WD 寫入資料 WL 字線 Write 寫入指示信號 lst_Write 比較無效化信號 W_BL 寫入位元線驅動信號 W_DL 寫入數位線驅動信號 WG0至WGn、WCSLL·寫入列選擇閘極 101 319644 200830313 - WCSL0 至 WCSLn 寫入列選擇信號 W__PUSLE 寫入時脈信號 -WIL 内部寫入資料線 • WREQ 再寫入要求 XADD X位址信號 XE 易磁化軸 YADD Υ位址信號 Z1 至 Z4 電阻元件 • ΦΨ 寫入模式指示信號 Φ WI 再寫入指示信號 Φ WF 寫入指示檢測信號 Φ WR 寫入檢測信號 Φυρ 計數遞增信號 .102 319644Fig. 33 is a view schematically showing the configuration of the main part of the seventh embodiment of the present invention. AM ^ Figure 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a reference voltage generating circuit of an MRAM according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. · 319644 95 200830313 准恭压# The diagram of the steps of the reference voltage generating circuit shown in the figure. The main diagram of the present invention is a view schematically showing the configuration of a modification of the main part of the inscription 8.5 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing a configuration of a second modification of the main portion of the MR 人 of the human body of the embodiment of the present invention. The main diagram and the diagram schematically show the overnight ninth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing the configuration of a third modification of the main diagram. Fig. 39 shows the signal waveform of the operation of the circuit shown in Fig. 38. The figure 40 shows the write power of the ninth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing the configuration of the drive activation circuit. The Lr diagram of the circuit displays a timing chart of the operation of the write current drive activation circuit shown in FIG. Fig. 42 shows a modification of the write current drive wide tongue-forming circuit according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 43 shows the timing of the circuit operation shown in Fig. 42 [Major component symbol description] disorder 1, 11 free layer 2 - 12 pinning layer 3 tunneling barrier layer 13 tunneling insulating film 20 memory cell array 22 ... write system circuit 319644 96 200830313 23 read system circuit 24 write control circuit 50 X decoder 52 DL driver / 1 [driver 54 Y decoder 56, 76 bit line driver 58, 90 sense amplifier 60, 306 Vref generation circuit 62, 112, 300, 400 instruction decoder 64, 114, 210, 302 job generator 65. Input data latch 66, 116 comparator 67 output data latch 69 address latch 70 digital Line decoding circuit (X decoding circuit) 72 Digital line driving circuit 73 Decoding control circuit 74 Y decoding circuit 78 Sense amplifier 80 X address decoding circuit 82 Word line drive circuit 92 Write driver 100 Source line decoder 102 Source line Drive 97 319644 200830313 • 120, 380 122 — 202, 222 ' 204, 304, 206 ^ 224 208 211 , 231 212 ^ 232 • 213 , 233 214 , 234 215 , 235 240 242 , 250 3 70i 376i A 382 402 404, 444 412 420 422, 452 430 432 ^ 434 Source line decoding control circuit source line decoding circuit write command detection circuit 408, 454 OR circuit write activation circuit pre-read disable circuit write current Driving activation circuit verification activation circuit, 410 busy signal generation circuit latch, 406 pulse wave generation circuit switching circuit, rewriting, request transmission circuit, bit line decoding circuit, bit line decoding control circuit, AND gate, write command detection circuit, counting circuit Re-write request transmission circuit reference voltage generation circuit, 453 selector drive circuit front-end circuit drive section ^ 98 319644 436 200830313 ^ 437 bit line drive circuit 439 voltage with 1 * * 442 timing adjustment circuit 446 variable delay circuit 448 setting /reset flip-flop 450 write current drive activation circuit AD address signal ADD internal address signal • AF non-magnetic film BL, BLOiBLn bit line B/RZ busy/ready signal CMP comparison circuit CLK clock signal CLKi internal Clock signal CIS constant current source • COMOjCOMn comparator DDLO to DDLn input Data latch DL digit line DO External readout data DOO to DOn Sub output data DI, DIO to Din Input data DLY1 to DLY6, DLY10, DLY11 Delay element E Electronic ΕΝ, ENO to ENn, ENi Sensing activation signal 99 319644 200830313 ^ EG EXOR gate FM1, FM2 ferromagnetic film G1 to G10, G3i, G8i, G9i AND gate T OG1 to OG4, OGli, OG3i, OG4i OR gate HI > H2 magnetic field IVK1JIVK4 inverter circuit IV3, IV4, IV4i Phase Iw Write current 10MC Memory unit ΜΒ0 to MBn Memory block MP/F Main verification result refers to signal NG1 to NG4 NAND gate NK1 NAND circuit NRK1 NOR circuit NQ1 to NQ4, NQ10 N channel MOS transistor • NDa node PAD connection pad P/F comparator output signal (verification result indication signal) P/Fi verification result indication signal PQ1 to PQ4, PQ10 P channel MOS transistor QDL0 ^ QDLn Output data latch RD Read data Read RGO to RGn Buy out the signal signal read gate, read column select gate RGO to RGn 100 319644 200830313 ^ RCSLi read column select gate RCSL0 to RCSLn readout column Select signal RSK0 to RSKn Readout column selection circuit | ROL Internal sense data line SΑΚ0 to SΑΚn Sense amplifier circuits SCK0 to SCKn, SCKi sense control circuit SL source lines SLT1 to SLT5, SLT10 to SLT12 Select circuit to SGL signal line SBW0 to SBWn, SBWi Sub-write system circuit TRS Access transistor TX1 to TX3 Switching element VDD Power supply voltage VR Variable magnetic resistance element, variable resistance element VREFR Read reference voltage ^ Vref Reference voltage VJFREN Verify read-activated signal WD write data WL word line Write write instruction signal lst_Write compare invalidation signal W_BL write bit line drive signal W_DL write digit line drive signals WG0 to WGn, WCSLL · write column select gate 101 319644 200830313 - WCSL0 to WCSLn Write column select signal W__PUSLE Write clock signal -WIL Internal write data line • WREQ Rewrite request XADD X address signal XE Easy magnetization axis YADD Υ Address signal Z1 to Z4 Resistive element • ΦΨ Write mode indication Signal Φ WI Rewrite indication signal Φ WF Write indication detection signal Φ WR Write Detection signal Φυρ count increment signal .102 319644

Claims (1)

200830313 ^、申請專利範圍·· 一種磁性體記憶體,係具備有: 禝數個記憶體單元,係排列成行列狀,並分別 3有可變魏電阻元件,藉由前述可變雜電阻元 的電阻值來記憶資料; 寫=系電路,係根據寫入資料,將前述寫入資料 二至前述複數個記憶體單元中成為寫 體單元;以及 G 寫入控制電路,係於前述寫入資料的寫入後,將 :述寫入對象的記憶體單元的記憶資料與前述寫入資 比較,並依據該比較結果使前述寫入系電路 對前述寫入對象的記憶體單元選擇性地執行寫入;盆 ψ J ”、 ,八 2. —2述寫人對㈣記憶體單元係於再寫人時,以與 寫入前相同的初始狀態進行再寫入。、 如申請專利範圍第!項之磁性體記憶體,其中, 復具備有複數條位元線,係對應各記憶體單元列 而配置’並分別連接至對應列的記憶體單元; 則述,入系電路係不論前述寫入資料的邏輯值為 何,而於資料寫入時在連接前 V 一 _ 丁仳^筏則返舄入對象的記憶體單 兀之位70線以相同方向流通電流; 前,控制電路復於前述寫入資料第一次寫入 象=述=入對象的記憶體單元之前,判斷前述寫入對 鳴體單元的記憶資料與前述寫入資料的邏輯值 319644 103 200830313 3· 二’當判斷為_致時,使前述寫入系電路停止 子别义舄入對象的記憶體進行寫入。 =申請專園第2項之磁性體記㈣,其中,復具 一婁仏位元線,係對應各記憶體單元列而配置, γ舄入耠刀別鈿加與來自前述寫入系電路的第一寫 入電^對應的磁場至對應列的記憶體單元,·以及, ,數條數位線’係對應各記憶體單元行而配置, 、寫入%·刀別施加與來自前述寫人系電路的第 入”場至對應行的記憶體單元; .’、、 別述寫入系電路係於前述寫入控制電路的判斷 4. ^致#,使則途第—及第二寫人電流的供給時序的 相對關係不同於前述寫入時的時序關係。 如申:專利範圍第1項之磁性體記憶體,其中, 一丽述寫入控制電路的判斷次數及寫入時間的至少 一方係具有預先設定的預定值; 夕 q 入系電路係不管前述寫入控制電路的判斷 二,,:致,而對前述寫入資料的寫入對象的記 :體早70反覆進行寫入順序,直至達到前述預定值為 如申請專利範圍第4項之磁性體記憶體,其中, 〜前述複數個記憶體單元係分割成複數個記憶 兀•區塊,且在各記憶體區塊中,前述寫入對 體單元係分別作為不调寫人資料位元的寫人對= 319644 104 5· 200830313 被選擇; 刖逑寫入控制電路係依各記憶體一 致判斷的動作; Τ 則述寫入系電路復具備有: 寫入電路,係對應各記憶體區塊而設置,且將對 應的寫入資料位元寫入至對應的寫入對象記憶體單 兀,以及, -,路,係根據前述寫入控制電路的一致判斷輸 單=止在對應的記憶體區塊的寫入對象的記憶體 早兀的寫入。 6· 7· 範圍第1項之磁性體記憶體,復具備有- —,述寫人控制電路檢測出不_致時,發送 舄入要求至前述磁性體記憶 =請專利範圍第丨項之雜趙記二復且借有一 生= 績述寫入控制電路的不-致檢測,在内 至ί㈡:代替來自外部的寫入指示,並供給 i刖述舄入系電路。 ^申請專利範圍第7項之磁性體記憶體,其中,前述 舄入控制電路係於接收到來自 部的寅入扣-士 I"1磁性體記憶體的外 皆=::’進行前述寫入對象的記憶體單元的 1丄貝枓與W述寫入資料是否一致的判 判斷結果使前述寫入系電路執行 口以 指示為在内部產生時,省略進行前述二 體單元的記憶資料與前述寫入資料的Si::: 319644 105 200830313 9· 直接使前述寫入系電路執行寫入。 如申請專利範圍第1項 … 、,、 項之磁性體記憶體,苴.中, 前述記憶體單元在益 , 八 早兀係猎由經過前述可變電阻元件 流通的電流來進行資料的寫入; 前述寫入控制電路係於第一次的資料寫入時,將 用以顯示前次比較結果的信號強制性地設定成顯示4 寫入不良的狀態。 106 319644200830313 ^, the scope of application for patents · · A magnetic memory system having: a plurality of memory cells arranged in a matrix, and each having a variable Wei resistance element, by the variable resistance element The resistance value is used to memorize the data; the write=system is based on the written data, and the written data is written into the plurality of memory cells as a writing unit; and the G writing control circuit is written in the foregoing data. After writing, the memory data of the memory unit to be written is compared with the write data, and the write system circuit selectively performs writing on the memory unit of the write target according to the comparison result. ; basin ψ J ”, , 八 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 a magnetic memory device in which a plurality of bit lines are provided, and a memory cell is disposed corresponding to each memory cell row and connected to a corresponding column; The logical value of the incoming data is, and when the data is written, V__仳仳^筏 is returned to the memory of the object, and the current line flows through the same direction. The front control circuit is repeated in the same direction. Before the written data is written to the memory unit of the object for the first time, the memory value of the written pairing unit and the logical value of the written data are determined to be 319644 103 200830313 3· In the case of the above-mentioned write system, the memory of the object to be input is stopped and written. = The magnetic body of the second item of the application garden (4), in which a bit line is duplicated, corresponding to each The memory cell is arranged in a row, and the gamma-input tool adds a magnetic field corresponding to the first write circuit from the write system circuit to the memory cell of the corresponding column, and, a plurality of bit lines Corresponding to each memory cell row, the write %·knife is applied to the memory cell from the first "field" of the write circuit to the corresponding row; .', and the write system is described above. The judgment of writing to the control circuit 4. ^致# The way that the first - and second opposing relationship written into the current supplied to the timing when the timing relationship is different from the writing. The magnetic memory according to the first aspect of the invention, wherein at least one of the number of judgments and the writing time of the write control circuit has a predetermined value set in advance; In the judgment of the control circuit, the result of writing the object to be written is: the body is 70, and the writing sequence is repeated until the predetermined value is reached as described in the fourth aspect of the patent application. The plurality of memory units are divided into a plurality of memory blocks, and in each memory block, the written pair unit is used as a writer for not writing the data bits, respectively. Pair = 319644 104 5· 200830313 is selected; 刖逑 Write control circuit is determined according to the consistency of each memory; Τ The write system circuit is equipped with: Write circuit, which is set for each memory block And writing the corresponding write data bit to the corresponding write target memory unit, and, -, the road is determined according to the consistent determination of the write control circuit = the corresponding The memory of the memory block written to the object is written earlier. 6· 7· The magnetic memory of the first item of the scope has the function of -, when the control circuit detects that it is not, send the request to the magnetic memory = the scope of the patent scope Zhao Ji is second and borrows a lifetime = the non-detection of the write-in control circuit, and the internal to ί (2): instead of the write instruction from the outside, and supplies the i-intrusion system. The magnetic memory of claim 7, wherein the intrusion control circuit performs the foregoing writing on the outside of the intrusion-incorporated I"1 magnetic memory from the part. Whether the result of the determination of whether or not the memory unit of the object is identical to the written data is such that the write system circuit execution port is instructed to internally generate the memory data and the write of the two-body unit. Input data: Si::: 319644 105 200830313 9· Directly write the write system circuit. For example, in the magnetic memory of the first, ..., , and the magnetic memory of the item, the memory unit is in the middle, and the data is written by the current flowing through the variable resistance element. The write control circuit forcibly sets the signal for displaying the previous comparison result to the state in which the display 4 is inferior when the first data is written. 106 319644
TW096139124A 2006-10-30 2007-10-19 Magnetic memory TW200830313A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2006294561A JP2010033620A (en) 2006-10-30 2006-10-30 Magnetic memory

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200830313A true TW200830313A (en) 2008-07-16

Family

ID=39344025

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW096139124A TW200830313A (en) 2006-10-30 2007-10-19 Magnetic memory

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2010033620A (en)
TW (1) TW200830313A (en)
WO (1) WO2008053677A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI508070B (en) * 2011-12-06 2015-11-11 Winbond Electronics Corp Programming method for rram
TWI700692B (en) * 2017-09-20 2020-08-01 日商東芝記憶體股份有限公司 Semiconductor memory device

Families Citing this family (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8456926B2 (en) * 2010-11-18 2013-06-04 Grandis, Inc. Memory write error correction circuit
JP2011060388A (en) * 2009-09-11 2011-03-24 Toshiba Corp Nonvolatile memory device
JP4956640B2 (en) * 2009-09-28 2012-06-20 株式会社東芝 Magnetic memory
WO2011036817A1 (en) * 2009-09-28 2011-03-31 株式会社 東芝 Magnetic memory
US8347175B2 (en) 2009-09-28 2013-01-01 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Magnetic memory
US8488363B2 (en) * 2010-05-11 2013-07-16 Qualcomm Incorporated Write energy conservation in memory
CN104303234B (en) * 2012-05-18 2017-12-12 国立研究开发法人科学技术振兴机构 Storage circuit
US9110829B2 (en) * 2012-11-30 2015-08-18 Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co. Ltd. MRAM smart bit write algorithm with error correction parity bits
US9613675B2 (en) * 2013-12-14 2017-04-04 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method to perform low power memory operations
JP2018156978A (en) 2017-03-15 2018-10-04 東芝メモリ株式会社 Magnetic storage device screening method, screening device and magnetic storage device manufacturing method
JP7187928B2 (en) * 2018-09-26 2022-12-13 Tdk株式会社 Spin-orbit torque magnetization rotation element, spin-orbit torque magnetoresistive element, and magnetic memory
KR102728525B1 (en) 2019-11-05 2024-11-12 삼성전자주식회사 Non-volatile memory device, writing method thereof, and storage device having the same
AU2023238881A1 (en) * 2022-03-23 2024-09-19 William Robert Reohr Methods and systems for writing state into superconducting circuits with integrated semiconductor-based circuits
WO2025220321A1 (en) * 2024-04-16 2025-10-23 ソニーセミコンダクタソリューションズ株式会社 Arithmetic circuit, nonvolatile memory, and method for controlling arithmetic circuit

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH01154398A (en) * 1987-12-10 1989-06-16 Fujitsu Ltd Semiconductor memory device
JP2647321B2 (en) * 1991-12-19 1997-08-27 株式会社東芝 Nonvolatile semiconductor storage device and storage system using the same
JP2005050424A (en) * 2003-07-28 2005-02-24 Renesas Technology Corp Change in resistance type storage device
US7085183B2 (en) * 2004-07-13 2006-08-01 Headway Technologies, Inc. Adaptive algorithm for MRAM manufacturing
JP4735948B2 (en) * 2005-03-29 2011-07-27 日本電気株式会社 Magnetic random access memory and operation method thereof

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI508070B (en) * 2011-12-06 2015-11-11 Winbond Electronics Corp Programming method for rram
TWI700692B (en) * 2017-09-20 2020-08-01 日商東芝記憶體股份有限公司 Semiconductor memory device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2008053677A1 (en) 2008-05-08
JP2010033620A (en) 2010-02-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW200830313A (en) Magnetic memory
CN109378029B (en) Semiconductor memory device
Chen et al. A 130 nm 1.2 V/3.3 V 16 Kb spin-transfer torque random access memory with nondestructive self-reference sensing scheme
TW578147B (en) Thin film magnetic memory device and information programming method
TWI223262B (en) Magnetic random access memory
TWI784591B (en) Power off recovery in cross-point memory with threshold switching selectors
US20090103354A1 (en) Ground Level Precharge Bit Line Scheme for Read Operation in Spin Transfer Torque Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory
CN101814314B (en) Method for programming the MRAM unit with feasibility read-in
CN108022613B (en) Nonvolatile memory device and method of operating the same
TW200939221A (en) Semiconductor memory device
TW200405336A (en) Nonvolatile memory device and semiconductor integrated circuit device with configuration switching the number of memory cells used for one-bit data storage
TWI342022B (en) A writing circuit for a phase change memory
TW589642B (en) Thin film magnetic memory device conducting read operation and write operation in parallel
JP2004310880A (en) Magnetic random access memory
US9966126B2 (en) Delay circuit of a semiconductor memory device, a semiconductor memory device and a method of operating the same
JP2006099835A (en) Semiconductor memory
US9966123B2 (en) Semiconductor memory device with write driver
TWI816451B (en) Magnetoresistive random access memory for physically unclonable function technology and associated random code generating method
US10311931B2 (en) Semiconductor memory device
JP2004022148A (en) Magnetic random access memory
US20190228829A1 (en) Semiconductor circuit, control method of semiconductor circuit, and electronic apparatus
JP2008217842A (en) Nonvolatile memory device
US10388348B2 (en) Semiconductor memory device and method of read/write operation for variable resistance elements
US10978124B2 (en) Method and circuits for programming STT-MRAM cells for reducing back-hopping
TWI675378B (en) Semiconductor memory device